DIVISION 15 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15010 MEP Specifications.pdf · division 15 basic...

DIVISION 15 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 15010

COPERNICUS HALL RENOVATIONS TO DIGITAL PRINTING & GRAPHICS TECHNOLOGY LAB CCSU PROJECT #23-118

APRIL 18, 2016; Page 1 of 10

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Materials and methods for performance of all mechanical work.

B. Provide complete and operational mechanical systems including, but not limited to, all required materials, parts, equipment, labor, tools, and accessories.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for mechanical installations.

1. Codes & standards. 2. Submittals. 3. Quality control. 4. Permits, fees, and inspections. 5. Schedule and sequence. 6. Project and site conditions. 7. Delivery, storage, and handling. 8. Record documents. 9. Operation and Maintenance manuals. 10. Warranties and guaranties. 11. Rough-ins. 12. Mechanical installations. 13. Cutting, patching, and firestopping. 14. Mechanical indentification.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Except as modified by governing codes, comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:

1. ANSI Standards. 2. Owner's Insurance Company. 3. Current Connecticut Laws and Statutes. 4. Requirements of the Federal Housing and Urban Renewal Department (ie. HUD).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide the number of mechanical related shop drawings, product data, and samples submitted, to allow for required distribution. 1. Shop Drawings: six (6) 2. Product Data: six (6) 3. Samples: six (6)

B. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit for review, detailed shop drawings and product data of all the equipment and material required to complete the work. No material or equipment may be delivered to the jobsite or installed until accepted shop drawings for the particular material or


SECTION 15010


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 2 of 10

equipment have been approved by the Owner or his authorized representative.

2. Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking will not entitle Contractor to claim extension of Contract time, or increase in contract cost.

D. Tests & Certificates:

1. As specified in other sections. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Drawings: 1. Drawings are diagrammatic. They indicate the general arrangement of systems and

work included in the contract. Drawings are not to be scaled. Site and Architectural drawings and details shall be examined for exact location of fixtures and equipment. Where they are not definitely located, this information shall be obtained from the Owner or authorized representative.

2. Surveys and Measurements:

a. Before submitting bid, visit site, become familiar with conditions under which work will be installed. Contractor will be held responsible for assumptions, omissions, and errors made as a result of failure to become familiar with site and contract documents.

b. Base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from established bench marks. All work shall agree with established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at site and check the correctness of same.

c. Notify the Engineer promptly of discrepancies between actual measurements and those indicated which prevents following good practice or intent of drawings and specifications. Do not proceed with work until Contractor has received instructions from Engineer.

B. Labor: 1. Cooperation with Other Trades:

a. Give full cooperation to other trades; furnish in writing to General Contractor, with

copies to the Engineer, information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay.

b. Where work will be installed in close proximity to, or will interfere with work of

other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If directed by the Engineer, prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale not less than 1/4" = 1'0", clearly showing how work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. If work under this division is installed before coordinating with other trades, or to cause any interference with work of other trades, make necessary changes to correct the condition without additional cost.

c. Furnish to other trades all necessary templates, patterns, setting plans, and shop

details for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work.

2. Materials & Workmanship:

a. Materials and apparatus required for the work shall be new and of first class

quality. Furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail. Select and arrange to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, furnish first class standard article as accepted by


SECTION 15010


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 3 of 10

Engineer.

b. Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be in constant charge of the work, together with skilled craftsmen and labor required to unload, transfer, erect, connect-up, adjust, start, operate, and test each system.

c. All equipment and materials to be installed with the acceptance of the Engineer in

accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. This includes the performance of such test as the manufacturer recommends.

3. Protection of Materials:

a. Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same

type or class are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer. b. Welding: Before any welding is performed, submit a copy of the Welding

Procedure Specification (WPS) together with the Procedure Qualification Record a required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

1) Before any welder performs any welding,submit a copy of the

Manufacturer's Record of Welder or Welding Operator Qualification Tests as required by Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. The letter or symbol (as shown on the qualification test form) shall be used to identify the work of that welder and shall be affixed, in accordance with appropriate construction code, to each completed weld.

2) The types and extent of non-destructive examinations required for pipe welds are shown in Table 136.4 of the Code for Pressure Piping, ASNI/ASME B31.1.

c. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part

thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to the installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.

1.6 PERMITS, FEES, & INSPECTIONS

A. Give all necessary notices, obtain and pay for all permits, and pay all government sales taxes, fees, and other costs, including utility connections or extensions in connection with work. File necessary approvals of governmental departments having jurisdiction. Obtain required certificates of inspection for work and deliver a copy to the Owner or his authorized representative before requesting acceptance for final payment.

1.7 SCHEDULE & SEQUENCE

A. Temporary Services: 1. Refer to the General Conditions and Special Conditions for a full description of the

temporary services to be provided.

B. Temporary Openings: 1. Ascertain from examination of the drawings any special temporary openings in the

building required for the admission of apparatus provided under this Division. Notify the Owner accordingly. Contractor shall assume all costs of providing such openings thereafter.


SECTION 15010


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 4 of 10

C. Sequencing:

1. Contractor shall coordinate sequence of work with owner's representative. 1.8 PROJECT & SITE CONDITIONS

A. Cutting, Patching, and Firestopping: 1. Furnish all cutting, drilling and patching. Furnish sketches showing the locations and

sizes of openings, chases, etc., required for the installation of work. Furnish the Contractor with an approximation of the number and size of openings, chases, etc., required.

B. Waterproofing:

1. Where any work pierces existing waterproofing, re-waterproof. The method of installation to be reviewed by Owner or his authorized representative before work is done. Furnish all sleeves, caulking, and flashing required to make openings watertight.

C. Fireproofing:

1. Where any work penetrates a fire rated assembly, provide UL listed, firestopping with hourly rating equal to that of the penetrated assembly. Fireproofing shall be compatible with the pipe or equipment doing the penetration so that fire rating of the assembly is maintained. Coordinate all fireproofing materials and assemblies with Engineer.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING

A. Delivery & Receipt: 1. Contractor is responsible for the delivery and storage of all materials, parts, equipment,

etc. required for this project.

B. Storage: 1. The Contractor shall store all material, parts, and equipment required for this project in

accordance with supplier's and manufacturer's recommendations, and Owner's requirements.

C. Handling, Hoisting, Rigging, & Scaffolding:

1. Furnish all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished under this Division. Remove same from premises when no longer required.

1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain at the job site a record set of drawings on which any changes in location of equipment, piping, ducts, valves, cleanouts, panels, and major conduits shall be recorded. These shall be clearly marked on a clean set of prints at the completion of work for record drawings and turned over to the Owner.

B. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements below:

1. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.


SECTION 15010


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 5 of 10

4. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed. 1.11 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS FOR DOMESTIC WATER HEATER SYSTEM

A. Bind Operation & Maintenance Manual for Mechanical System in a hard-backed binder.

1. Provide a master index at beginning of Manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of Manual.

2. First section shall consist of name, address, and phone number of Mechanical & Electrical Engineers, General Contractor and Mechanical, Plumbing, Sheet Metal, Refrigeration, Temperature Control & Electrical Contractors. Also include a complete list of equipment installed with name, address, and phone number of vendor.

3. Provide section for each type of item of equipment. 4. Submit three copies of Operation & Maintenance Manual to Engineer for his approval.

Use one of these approved copies during final inspection and leave with building maintenance personnel.

B. Include descriptive literature (Manufacturer's catalog data) of each manufactured item.

Literature shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable data underlined.

C. Operating instructions shall include:

1. General description of each mechanical system. 2. Step by step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment into

operation. 3. Provide schematic control diagrams for each separate fan system, refrigeration system,

heating system, control panel, etc. Each diagram shall show locations of start-stop switches, insertion thermostats, room thermostats, thermometers, firestats, pressure gauges, automatic valves, and refrigeration accessories. Mark correct operating setting for each control instrument on these diagrams.

4. Provide diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items such as firestats, fuses, interlock, electrical switches, and relays.

5. Provide drawing of each temperature control panel system.

D. Prepare maintenance manuals to include the following information for equipment items:

1. Manufacturer's maintenance equipment installed in Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers & lists, operation instructions of equipment and maintenance & lubrication instructions.

2. Summary list of mechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of equipment, location and type, and frequency of lubrication.

3. List of mechanical equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and name plate data of each item together with number and name associated with each system item.

4. List spare parts and quantities to be maintained in ready inventory at project site. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine

and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

6. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

7. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

E. Water Balance Test Run Reports


SECTION 15010


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 6 of 10

1.12 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTIES

A. Guarantee all material and workmanship under this Division for a period of one year, from the date of final acceptance by the Owner.

B. During guarantee period, all defects developing through materials and/or workmanship shall be

replaced immediately without expense to the owner. Make such repairs or replacements to the satisfaction of the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. As specified under other related sections.

B. As specified on drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS

A. As specified under other related sections.

B. As specified on drawings. 2.3 EQUIPMENT DEVIATIONS

A. Where the Contractor proposed to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the drawings which requires the redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical layout, all such redesign, and all new drawings and detailing required therefore, shall be prepared at the Contractor's expense and are subject to the review and approval of the Engineer. Owner reserves the right to have the Engineer prepare any redesign work.

B. Where such accepted deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of materials or

equipment from that specified or indicated on the drawings, the Contractor will provide additional equipment and materials required at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. When equipment or methods deviate from original plans or specifications, the Contractor must

submit a written request to deviate to the Engineer. At a minimum the request will address the following:

- equipment which is different than specified - name and data related to the proposed deviation - reason for deviation - advantages or disadvantages to the Owner - credit or increase in cost to the Owner - guarantees or warranties offered (if any) - acceptance of liability for equivalent performance.

2.4 MANUFACTURER'S IDENTIFICATION

A. Attach manufacturer's nameplate, name, trademark and address permanently to equipment and material furnished under this Division. Nameplate of a Contractor or Distributor is not acceptable.


SECTION 15010


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 7 of 10

2.5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors:

1. Electric motors furnished as a component part of equipment furnished under this Division shall conform to the requirements of IEEE, NEMA, UL, ANSI C50, and ANSI CI. Motors to be suitable for required load, duty voltage, phase, frequency, service and location.

2. Motors to be suitable for continuous duty at rated horsepower with temperature rise not to exceed 40oC for dripproof motors, 50oC for splashproof motors, and 55°C for totally enclosed motors. Motors to be capable of withstanding momentary overloads of 25 percent without injurious overheating.

3. Motors to have nameplates giving Manufacturer's name, serial number, horsepower, speed and current characteristics.

4. Motor leads shall be permanently identified and supplied with connectors. 5. Each motor to be selected for quiet operation in accordance with NEMA standards.

B. Motor Starters:

1. Electric motor starters shall conform to requirements of IEEE, NEMA, UL, ANSI, CI and

shall be suitable for the required load, duty, voltage, phase, frequency, service, and location.

2. When interlocking or automatic control of single phase motors is required, motors to be furnished with full voltage, across-the-line starters.

C. Connections:

1. All wiring to be furnished and installed under Division 16. 2. Power wiring to be furnished and installed complete from power source to motor or

equipment junction box, including power wiring through the starters. Starters not factory mounted on equipment shall be furnished and installed under Division 16.

2.6 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Bases & Supports:

1. Provide necessary foundations, supports, pads, bases and piers required for boiler, piping, pumps, tanks, and other equipment furnished under this Division. Submit drawings to Engineer for review before purchase, fabrication, or construction.

2. For boilers, and for equipment where foundations are indicated, provide concrete pads as shown. Extend pads six (6) inches beyond machine base in all directions with top edge chamfered. Submit shop drawings of foundations and pads to Engineer for review before construction.

3. Construction of foundations, supports, pads, bases, and piers where mounted on the floor to be of the same materials and same quality of finish as the adjacent surrounding flooring material.

B. Lubrication:

1. Lubricate all equipment having moving parts and requiring lubrication according to

manufacturer's recommendations prior to testing and operation. Equipment discovered to have been operated before lubrication is subject to rejection and replacement at no cost to the Owner.

C. Accessibility:


SECTION 15010


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 8 of 10

1. Be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases, adequate clearance

in double partitions and hung ceilings for proper installation of work. Cooperate with the Contractor and other contractors whose work is in the same space. Advise the Contractor of requirements. Such spaces and clearances shall be kept to the minimum size required.

2. Locate all equipment which requires servicing in fully accessible positions. Equipment shall include but not be limited to, valves, traps, clean-outs, motors, controllers, switchgear, and drain points. Any change shall be submitted to the Owner or his authorized representative for review.

D. Connection to Existing Structures:

1. Before cutting, drilling, attaching, or any work involving building elements, coordinate

work with others and Owner to avoid damage to building elements. 2.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Firestopping shall be UL listed, and tested in accordance with ASTM E814, E119, and E84.

B. Hourly rating shall be equal to that of the assembly being penetrated.

C. Firestopping shall be compatible with pipe or equipment penetrating the assembly fire rating of the assembly must be maintained.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.

3.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other

building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of

construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. 6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and

equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. 7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each


SECTION 15010


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 9 of 10

service. 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, to

greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Engineer.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

11. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

3.3 CUTTING, PATCHING, AND FIRESTOPPING

A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with the following requirements apply:

1. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations.

B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:

1. Remove and replace defective Work. 2. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents. 3. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 4. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 5. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide for

Engineer observation of concealed Work. C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and

materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the Work.

D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to

be removed. 1. Patch finished surfaces and building components using materials specified for the

original installation and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

E. Firestop all pipe and equipment that penetrates fire rated assembly. Follow manufacturer's

instructions to provide fire rating equal to that of the assembly. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform field tests as specified under other sections.

B. Arrange for local inspection authorities to inspect work performed prior to burial, closing-in behind wall and above ceiling or encase in concrete. Also arrange for final inspection of work and obtain Final Inspection Certificate before final inspection by Owner or his representative.

3.5 TESTING & BALANCING: See Section 15990 3.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. VALVE CHARTS AND TAGS


SECTION 15010


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 10 of 10

1. All valves shall be provided with valve tags secured to the valve stems or handles with brass chains or S hooks. Tags shall be based on Seton Nameplate Co. (Numbers and letter identification shall indicate service where valve is located. Tags shall be 1-3/8" diameter.

2. Furnish two (2) valve charts, one framed under glass and one unframed copy for record files. Charts shall indicate system designation, valve number, service, and location of valve. Use actual room names on charts.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Any part of a system stopped by foreign matter after being placed in operation, to be disconnected, cleaned, and reconnected to locate and remove obstructions. Work damaged in the course of removing obstructions will be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Cap all pipes to protect against entrance of foreign matter.

C. Remove rubbish, debris, and excess materials. Remove oil and grease stains on floor areas.

END OF SECTION - 15010

DIVISION 15 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 15050


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 1 of 6

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. General provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with mechanical installations as follows:

1. Selective demolition including:

a. Nondestructive removal of materials and equipment for reuse or salvage as

indicated. b. Dismantling mechanical materials and equipment made obsolete by these

installations.

2. Miscellaneous metals for support of mechanical materials and equipment. 3. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of mechanical

materials and equipment. 4. Joint sealers for sealing around mechanical materials and equipment; and for sealing

penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors, and foundation walls. 5. Access panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to mechanical materials

and equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for the following products:

1. Access panels and doors. 2. Joint sealers.

B. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications and anchorage for

mechanical materials and equipment.

C. Samples of joint sealer, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available for each product.

D. Welder certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders comply with requirements

specified under "Quality Assurance" article of this Section. E. Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition prior

to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of utility services and details for dust and noise control.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application joint sealers, access panels, and doors.

B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."


SECTION 15050



1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building Materials Directory" for rating shown.

1. Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver joint sealer materials in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with the manufacturers' recommendations to

prevent their deterioration and damage. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conditions Affecting Selective Demolition: The following project conditions apply:

1. Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain. Install and maintain dust and noise barriers to keep dirt, dust, and noise from being transmitted to adjacent areas. Remove protection and barriers after demolition operations are complete.

2. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical services passing through demolition area and serving other areas outside the demolition limits. Maintain services to areas outside demolition limits. When services must be interrupted, install temporary services for affected areas.

B. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within

the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do no apply joint sealers to wet substrates. 1.7 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the shut-off and disconnection of utility services with the Owner and the utility company.

B. Notify the building Owner at least 5 days prior to commencing demolition operations. C. Perform demolition in phases as indicated.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MISCELLANEOUS METALS

A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36.

B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.


SECTION 15050



C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications.

F. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required. 2.2 JOINT SEALERS

A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application.

B. Colors: As selected by the Engineer from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types:

1. One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,

Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

2. One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.

3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.

a. One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant:

1) "Chem-Calk N-Cure 2000," Bostic Construction Products Div. 2) "Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp. 3) "Silglaze N SCS 2501," General Electric Co. 4) "Silpruf SCS 2000," General Electric Co. 5) "864," Pecora Corp. 6) "Rhodorsil 5C," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 7) "Spectrum 1," Tremco, Inc. 8) "Spectrum 2," Tremco, Inc.

b. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant:

1) "Dow Corning 786," Dow Corning Corp. 2) "SCS 1702 Sanitary," General Electric Co. 3) "863 #345 White," Pecora Corp. 4) "Rhodorsil 6B White," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 5) "Proglaze White," Tremco Corp. 6) "OmniPlus," Sonneborn Building Products Div.

D. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C

834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent.


SECTION 15050



1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. "Chem-Calk 600," Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "AC-20," Pecora Corp. c. "Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div. d. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834," Tremco, Inc.

E. Fire-Resistant Joint Sealers: formulated for use in through-penetration fire-stopping around cables,

conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire- rated walls and floors. Sealants and accessories shall have fire- resistance ratings equal to that of the wall, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.3 ACCESS DOORS

A. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Provide with requirements indiated on drawings.

Frames: 16-gage steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling. 1. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 inch-wide-exposed

perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors. 2. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead. 3. For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead,

welded to perimeter of frame.

B. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint.

1. Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing

mechanism.

C. Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks.

D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Bar-Co., Inc. 2. J.L. Industries. 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc. 5. Nystrom, Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with


SECTION 15050



requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and application of joint sealers and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS

A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.

B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect

adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned mechanical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved.

B. Materials and Equipment To Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing mechanical

materials and equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged, and deliver materials and equipment to the location designated for storage.

C. Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and

equipment not indicated to be salvaged.

D. Mechanical Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following items:

1. Inactive and obsolete piping, fittings and specialties, equipment, ductwork, controls, fixtures,

and insulation.

a. Piping and ducts embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such materials do not interfere with new installations. Remove materials above accessible ceilings. Drain and cap piping and ducts allowed to remain.

2. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Section "Cutting

and Patching." 3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."

3.5 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to

products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants. 2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic- emulsion joint sealants.

15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PAGE 6 OF 6



B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

C. Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other

accessory materials, to fill openings around mechanical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.

3.6 INSTALLATION OFACCESS DOORS

A. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

B. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

END OF SECTION 15050

DIVISION 15 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 15055



PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies piping materials and installation methods common to more than one section of Division 15 and includes joining materials, piping specialties, and basic piping installation instructions.

1.2 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit product data on the following items:

1. Escutcheons 2. Dielectric Unions and Fittings 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seals 4. Strainers

B. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Submit welders' certificates specified in Quality Assurance below.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturer Uniformity: Conform with the requirements specified in Basic Mechanical Requirements, under "Product Options."

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering piping

materials and specialties which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Pipe Escutcheons:

a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. b. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. c. Grinnell

2. Dielectric Waterway Fittings:

a. Epco Sales, Inc. b. Victaulic Company of America

3. Dielectric Unions:

a. Eclipse, Inc. b. Perfection Corp. c. Watts Regulator Co.

4. Strainers:


SECTION 15055



a. Armstrong Machine Works. b. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c. Metraflex Co. d. R-P&C Valve; Div. White Consolidated Industries, Inc. e. Spirax Sarco. f. Trane Co. g. Victaulic Co. of America. (low pressure applications only) h. Watts Regulator Co.

2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS:

A. Refer to the individual piping system specification sections in Division 15 for specifications on piping and fittings relative to that particular system.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS:

A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.

B. Brazing Materials: Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for

brazing filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined.

C. Soldering Materials: Refer to individual piping system specifications for solder appropriate for each respective system.

D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast-iron flanges and

raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in which installed and which conform to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B16.20, or B16.21). Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of the fluid being carried.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES:

A. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon, with set screw. Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings.

B. Unions: Malleable-iron, Class 150 for low pressure service and class 250 for high pressure

service; hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends.

C. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe

materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.

D. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: Electroplated steel or brass nipple, with an inert and non-corrosive,

thermoplastic lining.

E. Y-Type Strainers: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Screens shall be Type 304 stainless steel, with 3/64" perforations at 233 per square inch.

1. Provide strainers with 125 psi working pressure rating for low pressure applications, and


SECTION 15055



250 psi pressure rating for high pressure application. 2. Threaded Ends, 2" and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centered

blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 3. Threaded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center

blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 4. Flanged Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-center

blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 5. Butt Welded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger For Low Pressure Application: Schedule 40 cast

carbon steel body, bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 6. Butt Welded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger For High Pressure Application: Schedule 80 cast

carbon steel body, bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 7. Grooved Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Tee pattern, ductile-iron or malleable-iron body and

access end cap, access coupling with EDPM gasket.

F. Sleeves:

1. Sheet-Metal Sleeves: 10 gage, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

2. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A53, Grade A.

G. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris for both inside and outside of piping and fittings before assembly.

3.2 INSTALLATIONS:

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Refer to individual system specifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals.

B. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or

floors, unless indicated otherwise.

C. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.

D. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted,

unless expressly indicated on the Drawings.


SECTION 15055



E. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls and other permanent elements of the

building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1" clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

F. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and

servicing of valves.

G. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball valve, and short 3/4" threaded nipple and cap.

H. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6" shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6" and larger shall be sheet metal.

I. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, or floors,

the fire rated integrity shall be maintained. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials 3.3 FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES:

A. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

B. Remake leaking joints using new materials.

C. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing or regulating valve, solenoid valve, and elsewhere as indicated.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve, and at the final connection to each piece of equipment and

plumbing fixture having 2" and smaller connections, and elsewhere as indicated.

E. Install Flanges in piping 2-1/2" and larger, where indicated, adjacent to each valve, and at the final connection to each piece of equipment.

F. Install dielectric unions to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in dry piping systems (gas,

compressed air, vacuum).

G. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems (water, steam).

3.4 JOINTS:

A. Steel Pipe Joints:

1. Pipe 2" and Smaller: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint lubricant or sealant suitable for the service for which the pipe is intended on the male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

2. Pipe Larger Than 2":

a. Weld pipe joints (except for exterior water service pipe) in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.

b. Weld pipe joints of exterior water service pipe in accordance with AWWA C206. c. Install flanges on all valves, apparatus, and equipment. Weld pipe flanges to pipe


SECTION 15055



ends in accordance with ASME B31.1.0 Code for Pressure Piping. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to torque specified by manufacturer of flange and flange bolts, to provide uniform compression of gaskets.

B. Non-ferrous Pipe Joints:

1. Brazed And Soldered Joints: For copper tube and fitting joints, braze joints in accordance

with ANSI B31.1.0 - Standard Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping and ANSI B9.1 - Standard Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

2. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of the fittings, using very fine emory cloth, prior to making soldered or brazed joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and apply flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces.

3. Mechanical Joints: Flared compression fittings may be used for refrigerant lines 3/4" and smaller.

C. Joints for other piping materials are specified within the respective piping system sections.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Testing: Refer to individual piping system specification sections.



SECTION 15055



PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

DIVISION 15 VALVES

SECTION 15100





1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general duty valves common to most mechanical piping systems.

1. Special purpose valves are specified in individual piping system specifications. 2. Gate valves smaller than 2-1/2" not allowed on project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data, including body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions.


A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for power piping.

B. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) Compliance:

Comply with the various MSS Standard Practices referenced. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valve ends against damage to threads, flange faces, and weld-end preps. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent

rattling; set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces; set butterfly valves closed or slightly open; and block swing check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for

storage. 2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature higher than

the ambient dew point temperature. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Not used.

DIVISION 15 VALVES

SECTION 15100



2.2 VALVE FEATURES, GENERAL

A. Valve Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems.

B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As required to suit system pressures and temperatures.

C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Operators: Provide the following special operator features:

1. Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn. 2. Lever handles, on quarter-turn valves 6-inch and smaller, except for plug valves. Provide

plug valves with square heads; provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves. 3. Gear drive operators, on quarter-turn valves 8-inch and larger.

E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged to

receive insulation.

F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.

G. End Connections: As indicated in the valve specifications.

1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B1.20.1.

2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves.

3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18.

a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 deg F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.

2.3 GATE VALVES

A. Gate Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; not used on project. B. Gate Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-70; Class 250 valves as indicated, iron body,

bronze mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B; with flanged ends, asbestos free, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and two-piece backing gland assembly.

2.4 BALL VALVES

A. Ball Valves, 1 Inch and Smaller: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG pressure; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, standard (or regular) port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends for condenser water, chilled water, and domestic hot and cold water service; threaded ends for heating hot water.

B. Ball Valves, 1-1/4-Inch to 2-1/2-Inch: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG

pressure; 3-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, conventional port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends for condenser water, chilled water, and domestic hot and cold water service; threaded ends for heating hot water.

2.5 GLOBE VALVES

DIVISION 15 VALVES

SECTION 15100



A Globe Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class as indicated; body and screwed bonnet of

ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, asbestos free, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Provide Class 250 valves meeting the above where system pressure requires.

B. Globe Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-85; Class as indcated, iron body and bolted bonnet

conforming to ASTM A 126, Class 250; with outside screw and yoke, bronze mounted, flanged ends, and asbestos free "Teflon" impregnated packing, and two-piece backing gland assembly.

2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Butterfly Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-67; cast-iron body conforming to ASTM A 126, Class 250. Provide valves with field replaceable EPDM sleeve, nickel-plated ductile iron disc (except aluminum bronze disc for valves installed in condenser water piping), stainless steel stem, and EPDM O-ring stem seals. Provide lever operators with locks for sizes 2 through 6 inches and gear operators with position indicator for sizes 8 through 24 inches. Provide lug or wafer type as indicated. Drill and tap valves on dead-end service or requiring additional body strength.

2.7 CHECKS VALVES

A. Swing Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class as indicated, cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having threaded or solder ends. Provide valves capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line. Provide Class 250 valves meeting the above specifications, with threaded end connections.

B. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class 250, cast iron body and bolted

cap conforming to ASTM A 126, horizontal swing, and bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring; and flanged ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.


A. Examine valve interior through the end ports for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally significant

features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the valve closure member to the shipping position.

C. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (i.e., out-of-round or local

indentation) and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

E. Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign materials, and proper alignment.

DIVISION 15 VALVES

SECTION 15100



F. Replace defective valves with new valves. 3.2 VALVE ENDS SELECTION

A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

1. Copper Tube Size, 2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hot water.

2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-Inch and Smaller: threaded end. 3. Steel Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: flanged.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system specification sections and contract drawings for specific valve applications and arrangements.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment

removal without system shutdown. Unions are not required on flanged devices. D. Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling-type valves.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

G. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.4 SOLDER CONNECTIONS

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.

B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner.

C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.

D. Open gate and globe valves to full open position.

E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.

F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve. Rotate

tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.

G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.

3.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS

DIVISION 15 VALVES

SECTION 15100



A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

B. Align threads at point of assembly.

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry seal

threading is specified).

D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.

3.6 FLANGED CONNECTIONS

A. Align flange surfaces parallel. B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat

and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper

shutoff and retention. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak persists.

3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive finish painting or insulation.


DIVISION 15 VALVES

SECTION 15100




DIVISION 15 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

SECTION 15140



PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:

1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements." 2. "Basic Piping Materials and Methods."

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following:

1. Horizontal-piping hangers and supports. 2. Vertical-piping clamps. 3. Hanger-rod attachments. 4. Building attachments. 5. Saddles and shields. 6. Spring hangers and supports. 7. Miscellaneous materials. 8. Equipment supports.

B. Related sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for pipe insulation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 1 specification sections.

1. Product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit

pipe hanger and support schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.

2. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their products meet the specified requirements.

3. Assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.


A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.


SECTION 15140



B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable BOCA plumbing code pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and anchors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.

1. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where

attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substates and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with installing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with Boca Plumbing and Mechanical Codes. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

B. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within

maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping.

C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and

other accessories.

D. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.

E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded.

G. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.


SECTION 15140



1. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold water piping that has vapor barrier.

Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following:

NPS LENGTH THICKNESS 1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060

2. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield. 3. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install where indicated, with insulation of same thickness as

piping. 3.3 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports. Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing, and so

that contours welded surfaces to match adjacent contours. 3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

3.5 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install water pipes, where practical, at same elevation and hang on multiple hangers. Do not install conduit on hangers with any other service. Install conduit above all other service pipes. Install the different service pipes, valves, fittings, and similar items such that after the covering is applied there will be not less than 1/2-inch clear space between the finished covering and other work and between the finished covering of parallel adjacent pipes. Install hangers for different service lines running close to and parallel with each other, in line with each other, and parallel to the lines of the building. Coordinate exact location of electric outlets, piping, ducts, and the like to avoid interferences between lighting fixtures, piping, duct, and similar items.

B. Vertical Pipes: Support vertical runs of pipe as shown on drawing and as follows.

1. Support vertical runs of pipe not over 15 feet long with hangers placed not over one foot

from the elbow on the connecting horizontal runs.


SECTION 15140



2. Support vertical runs of pipe over 15 feet long but not over 60 feet long and not over 6 inches in size, or not over 30 feet long and not over 12 inches in size on heavy steel clamps. Bolt clamps tightly around the pipes and rest clamps securely on the building structure without blocking. Weld clamps to the pipes or place clamps below couplings.

C. Hanger Spacing: Space hangers for piping so as to prevent sag and permit proper drainage.

Space single hangers for straight runs of standard weight steel pipe and copper tube as listed in 1997 International Plumbing Code. Space hangers for other piping materials in accordance with MSS SP 69. Install multiple trapeze hangers spaced not to exceed 12 feet. Install a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow.

D. Anchors and Attachment: Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations and the following.

1. In the event a self-drilling expansion shield or machine bolt expansion shield is considered to have been installed improperly, the Contractor shall make an acceptable replacement or demonstrate the stability of the anchor by performing an on-site test under which the anchor will be subjected to a load equal to twice the actual load.

2. Powder-driven fasteners may be used only where they will be concealed after the construction is complete. Where an occasional fastener appears to be improperly installed, additional fastener(s) shall be driven nearby (not closer than 6 inches) in undisturbed concrete. Where it is considered that many fasteners are improperly installed, the Contractor shall test load any 50 successively driven fasteners. If 10 percent or more of these fasteners fail, the Contractor shall utilize other fastening means as approved and at no additional cost to the State.

3. Hangers for piping and ducts shall be attached to cellular steel floor decks with steel plates and bolted rod conforming to the steel deck manufacturer's requirements. Where the individual hanger load exceeds the capacity of a single floor deck attachment, steel angles, beams or channels shall be provided to span the number of floor deck attachments required.

4. Welding may be used for securing hangers to steel structural members. Welded attachments shall be designed so that the fiber stress at any point of the weld or attachment will not exceed the fiber stress in the hanger rod.

E. Hangers Supported By Two Rods: Install hangers supported by two rods where required to mount

pipes in minimum space because of limited headroom. 3.6 ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. General: Anchor piping securely where shown on drawing or where required for a proper installation and to force the pipe expansion in the proper direction. Install anchors in accordance with MSS SP 69.

B. Vertical Pipes: Anchor vertical pipes by means of clamps welded around pipes and secured to

wall or floor construction. C. Expansion Joints: Install sliding anchors to absorb thrust due to internal pressure wherever

corrugated bellows expansion joints of the slotted hinge type are installed. 3.7 PIPE SLEEVES AND PLATES

A. General: Provide pipe sleeves for horizontal pipe passing through walls and partitions and for vertical pipes passing through floors. Provide floor plates for exposed vertical pipes passing


SECTION 15140



through floors and provide ceiling plates where the ceiling is finished. Provide horizontal pipes that pass through finished walls with wall plates.

B. Horizontal Pipes: Provide sleeves made of standard black steel pipe large enough to allow not

less than 1/4-inch clear around the pipe and any insulation. Set sleeves in place as the walls and partitions are built. Provide sleeves that pass through the entire wall or partition construction.

C. Vertical Pipes: Provide sleeves made of black steel, standard weight. Provide sleeves that pass

through the entire floor construction, including fill, and that allow not less than 1/4-inch clearance around the pipe and any covering. Provide sleeves in concrete caps, and secure to forms before the concrete is poured.

D. Plates: Provide escutcheon plates that are designed to allow for expansion. Fasten wall and

ceiling plates to the pipes or to the sleeves. Provide chromium plated plates.

E. Vertical Pipes in Wet Spaces: Provide penetrations for vertical pipes passing through floors in wet spaces, for example; toilet rooms, cafeteria kitchens, dishwashing rooms, utility cores, mechanical equipment rooms, and areas that are provided with fire protection sprinkler systems, with sleeves of black steel pipe; provide sleeves that project 2 inches above finished floor and that are sealed watertight in an approved manner.

F. Firestopping: Fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve in conformance with

"Firestopping" of Section 15010, "Mechanical Basic Requirements," "Firestopping," article.



SECTION 15140

DAVIDSON HALL FIRE CODE IMPROVEMENTS – PHASE 2 STATE PROJECT #BI-RC-307; CCSU PROJECT #01-CT

AUGUST 1, 2011; Page 6 of 6


DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 15190



PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY


B. This section includes mechanical identification materials and devices.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature and/or samples for each type of nameplate, label, marker, etc. to be used on the project, indicating compliance with specified requirements.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Allen Systems

B. Brady

C. Seton 2.2 MATERIALS

A. Valve Tags: Metal tags 1-1/2" minimum diameter, fabricated of 19-gage polished brass, stainless steel or aluminum, stamped or engraved with 1/4" high piping system abbreviation and 1/2" high sequenced valve numbers. Provide 5/32" hole for fastener.

B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Wire link brass chain or brass S-hooks.

C. Valve Chart Frames: Glazed display frame for each valve schedule, fabricated from extruded

aluminum or finished hardwood. D. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: Black rigid plastic engraving stock with beveled edges with

white (letter color) melamine subcore, except when other colors are indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.

1. Engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and with terms to match

equipment identification.

2. Thickness: 1/16 inch, except as otherwise indicated.

3. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or contact-type permanent adhesive.

4. Terminology: Include following, matching schedules as closely possible.


SECTION 15190



a. Name and plan number.

b. Equipment service.

c. Design capacity.

d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditional, and rpm.

5. Size: Approximate 2-1/2" by 4 inches for control devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-

1/2" by 6 inches for equipment.

E. Pipe Identification Markers: Self adhesive color coded polyvinyl chloride pipe labels in accordance with ANSI A13.1, (current edition) and OSHA to indicate pipe contents with flow directional arrows on the outside of the finished insulation or on bare pipe when insulation is not specified.

F. Pipe Markers: Pipe Markers shall be preprinted, color coded wrap around semi-rigid, snap on

labels: Section Nameplate “Setmark Type SN” or STR” or Brady ASNAP-ON”.

G. Arrows: Shall be pre-printed labels as follows:

For piping over 6" O.D. arrows shall be a minimum of 4-1/2" long similar to Seton Nameplate Setmark Flo-code tape arrows.

For piping 6" and smaller, arrows may be smaller, included on the pipe marker label such as Seton Nameplate “Setmark Type SNA or STR.”

Labels shall be located for maximum visibility close to valves and equipment, at each change of direction, at each access door or panel at each side for wall penetrations and at intervals not to exceed 20'-0".

H. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate permanently fastened to equipment and having data

engraved or stamped. 1. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating

and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and essential data, placed in an accessible and visible location.

I. Stencils: Standard stencils, prepared with letter sizes conforming to recommendations of ANSI

A13.1. Minimum letter height is 1-1/4 inches for ducts and 3/4 inch for access door signs and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Paint: Exterior, oil-based alkyd gloss black enamel, except as otherwise

indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

J. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, vinyl tape, at least 3-mils thick.

1. Width: 1-1/2 inches wide on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation) less than

6 inches; 2-1/2 inches wide for larger pipes.

2. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.


SECTION 15190



K. Access Panel Markers: 1/16 inch thick engraved plastic laminate markers, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 1/8 inch center hole for attachment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Coordinate with the Owner's maintenance staff to provide a complete identification system.

B. Valves:

1. Prepare lists of all tagged valves for each piping system. Include valve number, valve

location, floor level, piping system and abbreviation, and use. Type lists and mount in glass picture frame. Locate in the mechanical room or a location as directed by the Owner's Representative. Include copies in each maintenance manual.

2. Tag all valves with identifying number and system. Exclude plumbing fixture shutoff

valves, check valves and valves within manufactured equipment.

C. Pipe Identification:

1. Apply color coded markers on each system and include directional flow arrows. 2. On exposed piping, locate markers on 25 ft. centers of straight runs, at each valve and

control device (whichever is closer), and at points where piping enters and leaves a partition, wall, floor, or ceiling.

3. Apply markers on piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit

intermediately spaced markers.

4. Apply pipe markers at exit and entrance points to each A/C unit, vessel, tank, or piece of equipment.

5. Apply markers at access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of

concealed piping.

6. Mark each branch pipe with arrows to clearly indicate the direction of flow.

7. For insulated pipes, apply markers after insulation and painting work has been completed. Install markers prior to installation of suspended ceilings.

8. Use stencils on painted, uninsulated piping systems.

9. Piping identification schedule:

SYMBOL COLOR SERVICE DESCRIPTION FP SAFETY RED FIRE PROTECTION


SECTION 15190



D. Equipment: Install engraved plastic laminate signs or equipment markers on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Provide signs for following general categories of equipment:

1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices.

2. Meters, gages, thermometers, and similar units.

3. Tanks and pressure vessels.

4. Optional Sign Types: Stenciled signs may be provided instead of engraved plastic, at

Contractor's option, where lettering larger than 1-inch high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location of required identification.

a. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of unit where viewing distance is less

than 2 feet, 1/2 inch for distances up to 6 feet, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principal lettering.

b. Terms on Signs: In addition to name of identified unit distinguish between

multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.


DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL INSULATION

SECTION 15250





1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Mechanical insulation specified in this Section include the following:

1. Fiberglass pipe insulation. 2. Fiberglass duct insulation. 3. Insulation jackets. 4. Insulation accessories. 5. Equipment installation.

B. Definitions: Unless otherwise specified, interpret these words as follows:

1. Finished Spaces: All areas except furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated

spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces and tunnels.

2. Concealed Insulation: Insulation not visible in a finished space or in pipe shafts, furred spaces, above ceilings.

3. Exposed Insulation: Insulation visible in a finished or unfinished space. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Provide insulation conforming to the following standards:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Manufacture and test insulation in accordance with the ASTM standards, including: a. B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. b. C 165 Recommended Practice for Measuring Compressive Properties of

Thermal Insulation. c. C 167 Test Methods for Thickness and Density of Blanket or Batt Thermal

Insulations. d. C 177 Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmision Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. e. C 302 Test Method for Density of Preformed Pipe-Covering-Type Thermal

Insulation. f. C 303 Test Method for Density of Preformed Block-Type Thermal Insulation. g. C 305 Test for Thermal Conductivity of Pipe Insulation. h. C 356 Test for Linear Shrinkage of Preformed High-Temperature Thermal

Insulation Subjected to Soaking Heat. i. C 411 Test for Hot-Surface Performance of High Temperature Thermal

Insulation. j. C 533 Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. k. C 921 Practice for Determining Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal

Insulation. l. E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):

Provide and install pipe and duct insulation in accordance with the following ASHRAE standard:


SECTION 15250



a. 90 Energy Conservation in New Building Design.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Manufacture insulation in accordance with

the following NFPA standards:

a. 255 Test Methods, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. The following materials are exceptions to the flame/smoke rating requirements specified above:

1. Nylon anchors for securing insulation to ducts or equipment. 2. Cork or treated wood inserts used between shields and piping at hangers on

low-temperature piping. 3. Factory premolded one piece PVC fitting and valve covers. 4. Flexible unicellular insulation with smoke developed rating not exceeding 150.

C. Do not provide materials with flameproofing treatments subject to deterioration due to the

effects of moisture or high humidity. D. Flame/Smoke Rating: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings,

sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method. In addition, the products, when tested, shall not drip flame particles, and flame shall not be progressive. Provide Underwriters Laboratories Inc., label or listing, or satisfactory certified test report from an approved testing laboratory to prove that fire hazard ratings for materials proposed for use do not exceed those specified.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, K-value, thickness, corrosiveness and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. Also furnish necessary test data certified by an independent testing laboratory.

B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of

mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coating to the site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products.

B. Storage and Handling: Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical

damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:


SECTION 15250



1. Certainteed Corp. 2. Knauf 3. Manville Products Corp. 4. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.

2.2 INSULATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide insulation conforming with the referenced publications and the specified temperature ranges and densities in pounds per cubic foot (pcf).

B. Insulation Exterior: Provide insulation exterior that is cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking,

and non-peeling.

C. Physical Changes: Provide insulation that shows no physical changes that adversely affect its qualities under normal use at the intended use temperature.

2.3 FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION

A. General: Provide fiberglass pipe insulation conforming to ASTM C 547 Class 1 (450 degrees F. maximum), preformed and with vapor barrier jacket. K-factor maximum of 0.23 at 75 degrees F.

B. Fittings, Flanges, and Valves: Provide insulation for fittings, flanges, and valves premolded,

precut, or job fabricated of the same thickness and conductivity as used on adjacent piping. 2.4 FIBERGLASS DUCT INSULATION

A. General: Provide fiberglass duct insulation for exposed and concealed spaces as follows:

1. For exposed insulation, provide rigid fiberglass duct insulation conforming to ASTM C 612 block and board, Class 1 (temperature to 400 degrees F., non-load bearing, 10 pcf average maximum).

2. For concealed insulation, provide rigid fiberglass insulation as specified above or provide flexible fiberglass duct insulation with minimum 1-1/2 pounds per cubic foot density and with factory applied vaporproof jacket ASTM C 921, Type I.

3. Internally insulate all supply and return and outside air ductwork within mechanical room 4. Lining for Rectangular Metal Ducts shall be lined with 1" thick fiberglass duct liner with

factory applied edge coating or approved equal. The liner shall meet the Life Safety Standards as established by NFPA 90A and 90B, FHC 25/50 and limited Combustibility and airstream surface coating should contain an immobilized EPA registered, antimicrobial agent so it will not support microbial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G21 and G22. The duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071, with an NRC not less than ,70 as tested per ASTM C423 using a Type A mounting and a thermal conductivity no higher than ,25 BTU at 75 degrees F mean temperature.

2.5 FIBERGLASS EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. General: Provide fiberglass equipment insulation for exposed and concealed spaces as follows:

1. For exposed insulation, provide rigid fiberglass equipment insulation conforming to

ASTM C 612, block and board, Class 1 (temperature to 400 degrees F., non-load


SECTION 15250



bearing, 10 pcf average, maximum).

2. For concealed insulation, provide rigid fiberglass insulation as specified above or provide flexible fiberglass equipment insulation conforming to ASTM C 553, Type I (Resilient, Flexible), Class B5 (up to 400 degrees F., 2.0 pcf nominal).

3. Internally insulate (duct liner) all supply and outside ir return ductwork within mechanical room.

2.6 INSULATION JACKETS

A. General: Provide insulation jackets in accordance with ASTM C 921. Test insulation jacket as a composite with the insulation.

B. Type I or II: Provide jacket Types I or II complying with ASTM C 921.

1. Use Type I, vapor barrier type on cold piping, cold ductwork and cold equipment. 2. Use Type II, water vapor permeable type on hot piping, hot ductwork and hot equipment. 3. Cover jackets on exposed insulation with an additional glass cloth jacket and paint as

specified. C. Beach Puncture: Provide jacket Type I and II beach puncture per Federal Specification (FS)

HH-B-100, "Barrier Material Vapor (For Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal, Insulation)."

D. Type III: Provide protective jacket made of sheet aluminum in accordance with ASTM B 209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper, 0.016-inch thick. Provide a moisture barrier lining except where applied directly over a Type I vapor barrier jacket. Provide screw-lock stainless steel bands.

2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide insulation accessories compatible with materials to which applied and suitable for the service. Provide insulation accessories that do not corrode, soften or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state.

B. Adhesives, Coatings, Sealing Compounds, and Protective Finishes: Provide adhesives,

coatings, sealing compounds, and protective finishes in the following categories:

1. Category 1 Lagging adhesive and Coating for Glass Cloth Jackets and other Facings. 2. Category 2 Lap Adhesive for Vapor Barrier Jackets. 3. Category 3 Insulation Cement per ASTM c 195 (100 to 1600 degrees F), mineral fiber,

thermal conductivity 0.85 maximum at 200 degrees f mean when tested per ASTM c 177 ASTM C 196 (100 to 1800 degrees F) expanded on exfoliated vermiculite, thermal conductivity 1.1 maximum at 200 degrees f mean when tested per ASTM C 177 ASTM C449 (100 to 1200 degrees F), mineral fiber, thermal conductivity 1.1 maximum at 200 degrees F. mean when tested per ASTM C 177.

4. Category 4 Bedding Compound and Joint Sealers. 5. Category 5 Coating Compund - Vapor Barrier Treatment (For Indoor Use Only).

C. Staples: Provide outward clinching type staples, 3/4-inch nominal width, of monel metal.

D. Bands: Provide bands of galvanized steel, aluminum, brass, or nickel copper alloy of 3/4-inch

nominal width. Provide band thicknesses exclusive of coating not less than 0.005-inch for steel and nickel copper alloy, 0.007-inch for aluminum, and 0.01-inch for brass.


SECTION 15250



E. Wire: Provide wire of 14-gauge nickel copper alloy or copper clad steel, or 18-gauge, soft annealed galvanized steel.

F. Wire Netting: Provide wire netting for exposed surface of insulation to be cement finished.

Provide wire netting that is 22-gauge, 1-inch galvanized mesh, with continuous 26-gauge galvanized steel corner beads having 2-1/2-inch wings.

G. Corner Angles: Provide corner angles on insulation of exposed ducts and exposed equipment

formed of 28 gauge, 1-inch by 1-inch aluminum adhered to 2-inch by 2-inch heavy kraft paper to protect external corners under field applied jackets or facings.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. General: Install insulation material with smooth and even surfaces. Unless otherwise specified, install insulation materials, accessories and finishes in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations.

B. Surface Condition: Do not apply insulation materials until all surfaces to be covered are clean

and dry; all foreign materials, such as rust, scale, and dirt have been removed; and, where specified, surfaces have been painted. Insulation shall be clean and dry when installed and during the application of any finish. Do not install the insulation on pipe fittings, valves and pipe joints before the piping is pressure tested and approved.

C. Moisture and Vapor Seal: Provide a complete moisture and vapor seal wherever insulation

terminates against metal hangers, anchors and other projections through insulation on cold surfaces for which a vapor seal is specified.

D. Jackets: Provide jackets as follows:

1. Install jackets drawn tight with all joints having laps or butt strips of material identical with jacket, secured with adhesive or vapor barrier compound. Provide jackets on piping with not less than 1-1/2- inch laps at longitudinal joints and not less than 3-inch wide butt strips at end joints. Provide jackets on blanket, board and block insulation with 2-inch wide laps or 3-inch wide butt strips. Seal all openings, punctures and breaks in vapor barrier jackets with vapor barrier compound, Category 6.

2. On all exposed insulation, provide a glass cloth jacket directly over the Type I or II jacket, painted as specified.

E. Valves, Fittings and Flanges: Insulate as specified for the service involved and cover all

surfaces of the insulation with open weave glass cloth, glass tape or glass fabric of 40 by 40 or 20 by 20 mesh embedded between two 1/16-inch thick coats of vapor barrier compound Category 6. Install the fabric drawn smooth and tight with a 2-inch overlap at all joints.

F. Wall and Floor Openings: Install insulation and coating of jackets continuous through wall and

floor openings, except at fire dampers and smoke dampers.

G. Insulation Thickness: Provide insulation of thickness corresponding to the following tablesor as otherwise noted:

TABLE 1

PIPE INSULATION THICKNESS (INCHES NOMINAL)


SECTION 15250



Fiber Glass (FG).

TEMPERATURES PIPE DIAMETERS (Inches) (degrees F.)

0.25-1.25 1.5-3 4-5 6-10 12-36

35 to 59FG 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 60 to 200FG 1 1.5 1.5 2 2 201 to 250FG 2 2 2.5 2.5 3

3.2 INSULATION FOR HYDRONIC PIPING

A. General: Unless otherwise specified insulate piping and equipment for hot water heating systems.

B. Locations Insulated: Install insulation in the following locations and as indicated:

1. All supply and return piping and equipment. 2. Supply and return runouts from risers to convectors where concealed in floor

construction, dropped ceilings, or shafts and where exposed below floor or ceiling construction.

3. Expansion joints. 4. Equipment - including pumps, air spearators. expansion tanks, boilers, heat exchangers,

and other heating equipment.

C. Locations Not Insulated: Do not install insulation in the following locations:

1. Exposed radiator and convector supply and return runouts located less than 6 feet above floor.

2. Packaged type boilers and piping in underground conduits where insulation is specified under other sections of the specification.

D. Insulation Thickness: Insulate the heating system with the following insulation thicknesses:

1. Insulate heating system piping with insulation thicknesses specified in Table 1. 2. Insulate heating system equipment with insulation thicknesses specified in Table 2. 3. For expansion joints and pumps, provide same insulation thickness as that required for

adjoining piping. 4. For boilers, breachings, converters, provide same insulation thickness as shown in

Table 1 for pipes 12 to 36 inch in size in same temperature class.

E. Block Insulation: Install block insulation for use on piping and equipment operating at temperature above 600 degrees F. applied in double layer construction with staggered joints.

F. Pipe Insulation Jackets: Except for calcium silicate, provide preformed insulation for heating

piping with factory-applied jacket, Type II.

G. Fittings and Valves: Provide fittings and valves with insulation. Install insulation for system with temperatures less than 250 degrees F. flush with adjacent pipe insulation, and for other systems, install insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation with jackets.


SECTION 15250



H. Gaps and Terminations: Neatly terminate insulation at flanges and unions. Fill gaps occurring

at hangers with insulating cement and finish flush with the adjoining pipe insulation.

I. Unions, Flanges and Valve Bonnets: Provide unions, flanges, and valve bonnets for other than low-pressure systems, with readily removable sectional insulation of same composition and thickness as the pipe covering.

J. Type III Jackets: Provide and install protective jackets, Type III, to permit removal and

reinstallation of the insulation without damage for the following; expansion joints; pumps; booster heaters on dishwashing machines; and exposed and insulated steam supply and condensate return connections serving steam operated sterilizers, cooking equipment and laundry equipment.

3.3 INSULATION FOR STEAM HEATING PIPING

A. General: Unless otherwise specified insulate piping and equipment for heating systems.

B. Locations Insulated: Install insulation in the following locations and as indicated: 1. All supply and return piping and equipment. 2. Supply and return runouts from risers to convectors where concealed in floor

construction, dropped ceilings, or shafts and where exposed below floor or ceiling construction.

3. Expansion joints. 4. Equipment - including pumps, air spearators. expansion tanks, boilers, heat exchangers,

and other heating equipment.

C. Insulation Thickness: Insulate the heating system with the following insulation thicknesses:

1. Insulate heating system piping with insulation thicknesses specified in Table 1. 2. Insulate heating system equipment with insulation thicknesses specified in Table 2.

D. Pipe Insulation Jackets: Except for calcium silicate, provide preformed insulation for heating

piping with factory-applied jacket, Type II.

E. Fittings and Valves: Provide fittings and valves with insulation. Install insulation for system with temperatures less than 250 degrees F. flush with adjacent pipe insulation, and for other systems, install insulation of the same thickness as the pipe insulation with jackets.

F. Gaps and Terminations: Neatly terminate insulation at flanges and unions. Fill gaps occurring

at hangers with insulating cement and finish flush with the adjoining pipe insulation.

G. Unions, Flanges and Valve Bonnets: Provide unions, flanges, and valve bonnets for other than low-pressure systems, with readily removable sectional insulation of same composition and thickness as the pipe covering.

H. Type III Jackets: Provide and install protective jackets, Type III, to permit removal and

reinstallation of the insulation without damage for the following; expansion joints; pumps; booster heaters on dishwashing machines; and exposed and insulated steam supply and condensate return connections serving steam operated sterilizers, cooking equipment and laundry equipment.


SECTION 15250



3.4 INSULATION FOR AIR HANDLING AND AIR DISTRBUTION EQUIPMENT AND DUCTS

A. General: Unless otherwise specified insulate air handling and air distribution equipment. Insulate both supply and return ductwork.

B. Ventilation System Locations Insulated: Install insulation for ventilating systems with leaving

temperature less than 90 degrees F. in the following locations and as indicated:

1. Ducts and apparatus from outdoor (outside, fresh) air intakes to supply fan inlet connection for fans located outside duct or casing. Entire casing shall be insulated where fan is located within casing.

2. Supply ducts in unheated spaces immediately below roof and in unexcavated spaces. This includes all supply and return ductwork.

3. Heating coil enclosures.

C. Air Handling and Air Distribution Equipment and Ducts: Provide insulation for air handling and air distribution equipment and apparatus of rigid blocks or boards with a minimum dimension of 12 inches and a maximum dimension of 48 inches, except as follows:

1. Insulation for circular ducts exposed in finished spaces and less than 24 inches in

diameter shall be preformed pipe insulation of materials and application as specified under "Insulation for Low Temperature Piping" article, of this Section, and 1-1/2-inch thick.

2. Insulation for circular ducts exposed in finished spaces and 24 inches or over in diameter shall be rigid blocks or boards or preformed pipe insulation. The preformed or block insulation shall be sized or cut, beveled, and scored to provide a complete and tight fit to the duct surface. Thickness shall be 1-1/2 inches.

3. Insulation for concealed ducts shall be either rigid blocks or boards or preformed insulation as specified in Table 2 or fiberglass flexible insulation and 1-1/2 inches thick.

4. Duct liner completely covered with 1" thick duct liner. The smooth, black coated surfaces of the duct liner shall face the air stream. Duct liner shall be cut to assure tight overlapped corner joints. The top pieces.

5. Duct liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal with full coverage of an approved adhesive that conforms to ASTM C 916, and all exposed leading edges and transverse joints shall be coated and shall be neatly butted with out gaps. Shop or field cuts shall be liberally coated with manufacturer’s treatment or approved adhesive.

6. The duct liner shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners spaced per the manufacturer=s schedule. The pin length should be such as to hold the material firmly in place with minimum compression of the material.

D. Concealed Duct Flexible Insulation: Secure the flexible insulation for concealed ducts with

long sides or diameters less than 24 inches tightly and smoothly with a bonding adhesive, Category 3, applied in 6-inch wide transverse strips on 12-inch centers. Secure the flexible insulation for ducts with long sides or diameters of 24 inches or more tightly and smoothly with metal or nylon anchors or pins, cemented or welded to the ducts as specified in "Block and Board Insulation" paragraph, of this Section, above spaced not more than 13 inches apart each way. Do not permit sagging of the insulation and provide sufficient bonding adhesive or fasteners to prevent this.

E. Insulation Jackets: Provide insulation for air handling and air distribution equipment and ducts

with jackets as specified under "Insulation Jackets" article, of this Section. Provide Type I jackets for air conditioning and Type II jackets for ventilating and air heating. For insulation on ventilating and air heating ducts and equipment, install the jackets at all joints with a 2-inch


SECTION 15250



wide lap drawn tight and secured with staples on 4-inch centers and 1-inch from edges of laps.


DIVISION 15 FIRE PROTECTION

SECTION 15300



PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY


B This Section specifies automatic sprinkler systems for buildings and structures. Materials and

equipment specified in this Section include:

1. Pipe, fittings, valves, and specialties. 2. Sprinklers, combination fire and accessories. 3. Hydrant flow test information update.

C. Products furnished but not installed include sprinkler head cabinet with spare sprinkler heads.

Furnish to the Owner's maintenance personnel. 1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).

B. Other definitions for fire protection systems are listed in NFPA Standards 13 and 14.

C. Shop Drawings as used in this Section means those documents (including drawings) prepared pursuant to the requirements contained in NFPA 13 "Working Drawings" for obtaining approval of the authority having jurisdiction and FM Global

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION/SCOPE OF WORK

A. Scope of Work shall include but not limited to: Providing fire protection systems shall be modified/expanded as indicated on fire protection drawings (SP-1). The system shall be hydraulically designed and calculated. Provide per the requirements of NFPA 13,UL and FM Global. Provide stamped drawings and calculation (P.E. stamp).

B. Install system per FM Global recommended good practices and FM Global data sheet 2-8N

installation of sprinkler system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty, and components provided

B. Shop Drawings prepared in accordance with NFPA 13 Chapter 8-1, 8-2, and 8-3 identified as

"Working Plans". Provide hydraulic calculations of piping arrangement of working plans. Coordinate working plans with all conditions in field, both hidden and visible. Pipe sizes shall be based on fire protection design calculation data and hydrant flow test information A minimum of 5 psi safety cushion shall be applied to hydrant test results. Engineer reserves the right to change any pipe sizes to meet project conditions. Provide working plans signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Connecticut, for the hydraulically most demanding of each hazard type, per the criterial indicated on fire protection drawings.

C. Fire Protection contractor shall submit fire protection shop drawings to FM Global and the

Engineer of Record for review and approval. Fire Protection work shall not commence until


SECTION 15300



approved drawings are received.

D. Include earthquake bracing shop drawings. Provide in accordance with NFPA 13. Shop drawings shall show location and type of bracing.

E. Maintenance Data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty, for

inclusion in operating and maintenance manual specified in Division-15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements."

F. Welders' qualification certificates.

G. Test Reports and Certificates include "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Aboveground

Piping" FM Global form 85A, attached to this specification.

H. Flow Test Information

The contractor shall use the flow test information in hydraulically designing the fire protection systems per the requirements of NFPA and FM Global. The flow test information is attached to this specification.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installation and alterations of fire protection piping, equipment, specialties, and accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer. The term qualified means experienced in such work (experienced shall mean having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with all precautions required, and has complied with all the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the Engineer.

B. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of AWS

D10.9, Specifications for Qualifications of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level AR-3."

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes:

1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 3. NFPA 1963 - Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections. 4. UL and FM Compliance: Fire protection system materials and components shall be

Underwriter's Laboratories listed and labeled, and Factory Mutual approved for the application anticipated.

D. Install system per FM Global recommended good practices and FM Global data sheet 2-8N

installation of sprinkler system. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule rough-in installations with installations of other building components. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, 2 valve wrenches for each type of sprinkler head installed.


SECTION 15300



B. Sprinkler Heads and Cabinets: Furnish six extra sprinkler heads of each style included in the

project. Furnish each style with its own sprinkler head cabinet and special wrenches as specified in this Section.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection system products from those companies listed in the UL Fire Protection Directory, and Factory Mutual Approval Guide.

2.2 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3 for identification of systems where the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A795, Schedule 40, black steel pipe, plain ends.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A795, Schedule 10, black steel pipe, plain ends.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.

B. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints, 175 psi working pressure

minimum. C. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47 Grade

32510 malleable iron; or ASTM A53, Type F or Types E or S, Grade B fabricated steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings, 175 psi working pressure minimum.

D. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: consist of ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic rubber

gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll-grooved pipe and fittings, 175 psi working pressure minimum.

E. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; bolt holes spot faced. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Welding Materials: Comply, with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.

B. Gasket Materials: thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid or gas to be handled, and design

temperatures and pressures. 2.5 GENERAL DUTY VALVES

A. Grooved end valves: 4-inch and smaller: ductile iron body, slow closing, 175 psig working pressure UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service. Ball valves shall have stainless


SECTION 15300



steel ball with teflon seats. Butterfly valves shall have disc coated with EPDM. Valves shall have position indicators and provisions for mounting supervisory tamper switches.

B. Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller: body and bonnet of cast bronze, 175 pound cold water working

pressure - non-shock, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, screw-in bonnet, and malleable iron handwheel. Valves shall be capable of being locked open with valve wide open.

C. Gate Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: iron body; bronze mounted, 175 pound cold water working

pressure - non-shock. Valves shall have solid taper wedge; outside screw and yoke, rising stem; flanged bonnet, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B; replaceable bronze wedge facing rings; flanged ends; and a packing assembly consisting of a cast iron gland flange, brass gland, packing, bonnet, and bronze bonnet bushing. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wide open, and provisions of mounting of tamper switch.

D. Swing Check Valves: MSS SP-71; Class 175, cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM

A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.

2.6 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Test and Drain: Water Flow alarm test module, with valve for draining floor section without draining entire system. Ductile iron body, bronze valves, orifice of size equal to sprinkler heads, and flow sight glass.

2.7 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS

A. Sprinkler Heads: style as indicated or required by the application. Unless otherwise indicated, provide heads with 1/2 inch discharge orifice.

B. Sprinkler Head Finishes: Provide heads with the following finishes:

1. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Styles: chrome plated in finish spaces, exposed to view;

rough bronze finish for heads in unfinished spaces and not exposed to view. 2. Provide chrome plated pendent style with chrome plated escutcheons in suspended eilings.

C. Temperature Ratings: Provide "Ordinary" range, except in locations where NFPA 13 specifies

higher temperature range based on surrounding temperatures. 2.8 ALARM DEVICES

A. General: Types and sizes shall mate and match piping and equipment connections.

B. Supervisory Switches: SPST, normally closed contacts, designed to signal valve in other than full open position.


A Install system per FM Global recommended good practices and FM Global data sheet 2-8N installation of sprinkler system.


SECTION 15300



B. Examine ceilings and walls for suitable conditions where piping and heads are to be installed.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inch and smaller.

B. Install Schedule 10 steel pipe with roll-grooved ends and grooved mechanical couplings for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.

1. Deviations from approved "Working Plans" for sprinkler piping, require written approval of

the authority having jurisdiction. Written approval shall be on file with the Engineer prior to deviating for the approved "Working Plans."

B. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.

C. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions

in pipe sizes.

D. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings.

E. Install flanges or flange adapters on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and

larger connections.

F. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions, for rigid systems. Provide protection from damage to earthquake in accordance with NFPA 13, Building Code, and FM Global.

G. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with shutoff valve.

Test connections may also serve as drain pipes.

H. Install pressure gage on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gage with a connection not less than 1/4 inch and having a soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and where they will not be subject to freezing.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Welded Joints: AWS D10.9, Level AR-3.

B. Threaded Joints: conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows:


SECTION 15300



1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.

2. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads. 4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place the

wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded, or damaged. If a

weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used.

C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.

D. Mechanical Grooved Joints: cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible with the

couplings.

E. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Gate Valves: Install supervised-open valves so located to control all sources of water supply

except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve.

C. Reduced Pressure Zone Backflow Preventer: Install in proper direction of flow vertical to prevent

backflow into public water mains. 3.6 SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATIONS

A. Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations.

B. Install in accordance with NFPA 13 and Manufacturer's instructions. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLS A. The contractor shall satisfactory complete the Contractor’s Material and Test Certificate Form

Form 85A, attached. The project will not be considered substantial complete until final acceptance is relieved by FM Global upon FM Global field examination.

B. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13.

C. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems in accordance with NFPA 14.

D. Replace piping system components which do not pass the test procedures specified, and retest

repaired portion of the system. END OF SECTION 15300

DIVISION 15 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

SECTION 15411


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 1 of 10


A. This Section includes potable cold water, hot water, and circulation hot water piping, fittings, and specialties within the building to a point 5 feet outside the building.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Water Distribution Pipe: A pipe within the building or on the premises that conveys water from the water service pipe or meter to the points of usage.

B. Water Service Pipe: The pipe from the water main or other source of potable water supply to

the water distributing system of the building served.

C. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are nominal pipe size (NPS). 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections.

1. Product data for each piping specialty and valve specified.

2. Welder Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

3. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements specified below.

4. Test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section. 5. Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified for inclusion in

Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section - "Basic Mechanical Requirements."


A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following codes:

1. ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Safety

valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing

Qualifications" for Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.


SECTION 15411


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 2 of 10

B. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish one valve key for each key-operated wall hydrant, hose bibb, fixture supply, or faucet installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following:

1. Basket Strainers:

a. Josam Co. b. Metraflex Co. c. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. d. Spirax Sarco, Inc. e. Victaulic Co. of America

2. Balance Cocks:

a. Hammond Valve Corp. b. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. c. Nibco, Inc. d. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc.

3. Hose Bibbs:

a. Lee Brass Co. b. Mansfield Plumbing Products c. Nibco, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co. e. Woodford Mfg. Co.

4. Wall Hydrants:

a. Josam Co. b. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. c. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe d. Woodford Mfg. Co. e. Zurn Industries Inc., Hydromechanics Div.

5. Backflow Preventers:

a. Cla-Val Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Febco d. Hersey Products, Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co.


SECTION 15411


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 3 of 10

f. Zurn Industries Inc. Wilkins Regulator Div.

6. Pressure-Regulating Valves:

a. Cash (A. W.) Valve Mfg. Corp. b. Cla-Val Co. c. Spence Engineering Co., Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co. e. Zurn Industries Inc., Wilkins Regulator Div.

7. Water Meters:

a. Badger Meter, Inc. b. Hays Div., Romac Industries c. Hersey Products, Inc. d. Neptune Water Meter Co.; Subs. Neptune Intl. Corp. e. Rockwell Intl.; Measurement & Flow Control Div.

8. Relief Valves:

a. Cash (A. W.) Valve Mfg. Corp. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Watts Regulator Co. d. Zurn Industries, Inc. Wilkins Regulator Div.

9. Water Hammer Arresters:

a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Ancon, Inc. c. Josam Co. d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. f. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe g. Watts Regulator Co. h. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.

10. Mechanical Couplings and Fittings For Grooved-End Steel Pipe:

a. Grinnell Corp. b. Gustin-Bacon Div., Tyler Pipe c. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America

11. Mechanical Couplings and Fittings For Grooved-End Copper Tube:

a. Victaulic Co. of America

12. Compression Fittings For PB Plastic Pipe:

a. Brass-Craft Sub. of Masco Corp.

13. Vacuum Breakers For Hose Connections:

a. Cash (A.W.) Valve Mfg. Corp.


SECTION 15411


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 4 of 10

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Watts Regulator Co.

2.2 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L Water Tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K Water Tube, annealed temper.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.

B. Wrought Copper and Bronze Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 Tube and ASTM B 584 Bronze Castings.

C. Dielectric Unions: Threaded, solder, or grooved-end connections as required to suit

application; constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent corrosion.

D. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze wire reinforced

protective jacket; minimum 150 psig working pressure, maximum 250 deg F operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, 95-5 Tin-Antimony. B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series.

C. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and design

temperatures and pressures. 2.5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

A. General-duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." Special duty valves are specified below by their generic name; refer to Part 3 Article "Valve Application" for specific uses and applications for each valve specified.

2.6 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES

A. Balance Cocks: 400 PSI WOG, 2 piece, ball valve, handle, memory stop, with threaded-end connections conforming to ASME B1.20.1.

B. Balance Cocks: 400 psi WOG, 2 piece bronze, ball valve, handle, memory stop, with

solder-end connections. 2.7 PIPING SPECIALTIES


SECTION 15411


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 5 of 10

A. Water Hammer Arresters: Bellows type, with stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250 psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201.

B. Basket Strainers: Cast-iron body, 125 psi flanges, bolted-type or yoke-type cover with

removable noncorrosive perforated strainer basket having 1/8-inch perforations and lift-out handle.

C. Hose Connections: Hose connections shall have garden hose thread outlets conforming to

ASME B1.20.7.

D. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body, renewable composition disc, tee handle, 1/2- or 3/4-inch solder inlet, hose outlet.

E. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with chrome- or nickel-plated finish, with renewable composition

disc, wheel handle, 1/2- or 3/4-inch solder inlet, hose outlet.

F. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with chrome- or nickel-plated finish, with renewable composition disc, wheel handle, 1/2- or 3/4-inch solder inlet, hose outlet.

G. Recessed Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: Cast-bronze box, with chrome- plated face, tee handle

key, vacuum breaker, hinged locking cover, 3/4-inch inlet, and hose outlet. Bronze casing shall be length to suit wall thickness.

H. Projecting Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: Cast-bronze, with chrome-plated face, tee handle key, vacuum breaker, 3/4-inch inlet, and hose outlet. Bronze casing shall be length to suit wall thickness.

I. Floor Level Nonfreeze Hydrants: Cast-bronze hydrant, with rough bronze box, tee-handle

key, drain hole, vacuum breaker, hinged locking cover, 3/4-inch inlet, and hose outlet. Bronze casing shall be length to suit depth of bury.

J. Nonfreeze Post Hydrants: Cast-bronze hydrant, with tee-handle key, drain hole, vacuum

breaker, 3/4-inch inlet, and hose outlet. Bronze casing with cast-iron casing guard shall be length to suit depth of bury.

K. Vacuum Breakers: Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE Standard 1011,

with finish to match hose connection.

L. Backflow Preventers: Reduced-pressure-principle assembly consisting of shutoff valves on inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet. Assemblies shall include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve located between 2 positive seating check valves and comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1013.

M. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Single-seated, direct-operated type, having bronze body with

integral strainer and complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1003. Select proper size for maximum flow rate and inlet and outlet pressures required.

N. Relief Valves: Sizes for relief valves shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Codes for required capacity of the appliance for which installed.

1. Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, thermostat, complying with ANSI Z21.22 listing requirements for temperature discharge capacity. Temperature relief valves shall be factory set at 210 deg F, and pressure relief at 150 psi.


SECTION 15411


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 6 of 10

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment with water connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.

3.2 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. Install Type L, drawn copper tube with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for pipe sizes 4 inches and smaller, above ground, within building. Install Type K, annealed temper copper tube for pipe sizes 2 inches and smaller, with minimum number of joints, below ground.

B. Water piping in sizes 2-1/2 to 6 inches may be Type L drawn copper tube with roll-grooved

ends and mechanical couplings, above ground, within building. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate

the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as required.

B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and branch connections.

C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not

permitted unless expressly required.

D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.

E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade

or floors.

F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1-inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation and

servicing of valves.

H. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch ball valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple and cap.

I. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls with sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inches shall be galvanized steel pipe; pipe sleeves 6 inches and larger shall be galvanized steel sheet metal.

J. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass though fire-rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and

floors, maintain the fire-rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.


SECTION 15411


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 7 of 10

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices conforming to MSS SP-69 are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors

B. Pipe Attachments: Install the following: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual horizontal runs less than 20

feet in length. 2. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, and spring hangers, MSS Type 41 with Type

49, for individual horizontal runs 20 feet and longer. 3. Pipe roll, complete MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer, support

on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

C. Install hangers for horizontal piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes as required by current International Plumbing Codes and requirements of Governing Authorities:

3.5 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Soldering Manual."

B. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual."

1. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts of piping specialties before soldering and brazing.

2. Fill the tubing and fittings during soldering and brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale.

3. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature.

C. Threaded Joints: Conform to ASME B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field-cut threads. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 2. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except

where dry seal threading is specified). 4. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.

a. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with corroded or damaged threads. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not

be used.

D. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

E. Grooved-End Joints: Prepare pipe and tubing and install in accordance with manufacturer's

installation instructions.


SECTION 15411


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 8 of 10

3.6 ROUGH-IN FOR WATER METER

A. Install rough-in piping and specialties for water meter installation in accordance with utility company's instructions and requirements.

3.7 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General-Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Provide

specific valve types as required:

1. Shut-off duty: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves. 2. Throttling duty: Use globe, ball, and butterfly valves.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections. For sectional valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for sectional valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, on each

supply to each plumbing fixture. For shutoff valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for shutoff valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.

C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to drain

equipment completely for service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to drain distribution piping system completely. For drain valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for drain valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.

D. Check Valves: Install swing check valves on discharge side of each pump and elsewhere as

required.

E. Balance Cocks: Install in each hot water recirculating loop, discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as required.

F. Hose Bibbs: Install on exposed piping where required with vacuum breaker.

G. Wall Hydrants: Install where required with vacuum breaker.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Install backflow preventers at each connection to mechanical equipment and systems and in compliance with the plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate in same room as equipment being connected. Install air cap fitting and pipe relief outlet drain without valves to nearest floor drain.

B. Install pressure-regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance cock bypass.

Install pressure gage on valve outlet.


SECTION 15411


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 9 of 10

3.10 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes required, but in no case smaller than required by plumbing code.

B. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to

mechanical equipment as required. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection; provide drain valve on drain connection. For connections 2-1/2 inches and larger, use flanges instead of unions.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the plumbing official.

a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before

concealed or closed in after system is roughed in and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to

observe the tests specified below and to ensure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code.

3. Reinspections: Whenever the plumbing official finds that the piping system will not

pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the plumbing official.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by the plumbing official.

B. Test water distribution piping as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced water distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig above the operating pressure without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system materials. Isolate the test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

4. Repair all leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action. 3.12 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:


SECTION 15411


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 10 of 10

1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use.

2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure proscribed by the authority having jurisdiction or, in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA C651, or AWWA C652, or as described below:

a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not

appear at the points of outlet. b. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50

parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours.

c. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

d. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction. Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities.

3.13 COMMISSIONING

A. Fill the system. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is completely full of water.

B. Before operating the system, perform these steps:

1. Close drain valve, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open valves to full open position. 3. Remove and clean strainers. 4. Check pumps for proper direction of rotation. Correct improper wiring. 5. Lubricate pump motors and bearings.


DIVISION 15 DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS

SECTION 15420


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 1 of 10


A. This Section includes building sanitary and storm drainage and vent piping systems, including drains and drainage specialties.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the discharge from soil, waste, and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and conveys it to the building sewer.

B. Building Sewer: That part of the drainage system which extends from the end of the building

drain and conveys its discharge to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage disposal system, or other point of disposal.

C. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys

sewage, rain water or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains of public sewer systems or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant.

D. Vent System: A pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system, or

to provide a circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and back pressure.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for the following products:

1. Drainage piping specialties 2. Floor drains 3. Trench drains 4. Roof drains


A. Regulatory Requirements: comply with the provisions of the following:

1. International Plumbing Code. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the installation of roof drains, flashing, and roof penetrations.

B. Coordinate flashing materials installation of roofing, waterproofing, and adjoining substrate

work.

C. Coordinate the installation of drains in poured-in-place concrete slabs, to include proper drain elevations, installation of flashing, and slope of slab to drains.

D. Coordinate with installation of sanitary and storm sewer systems as necessary to interface


SECTION 15420


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 2 of 10

building drains with drainage piping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering drainage and vent systems which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Drainage Piping Specialties, including backwater valves, expansion joints, drains, trap

primers, and vandal-proof vent caps:

a. Josam Mfg. Co. b. Smith (Jay R) Mfg. Co. c. Tyler Pipe; Subs. of Tyler Corp. d. Zurn Industries Inc; Hydromechanics Div.

2. Freeze-proof vent caps:

a. F.J. Moore Mfg. Co.

2.2 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, Type DWV for pipe, and cast-bronze, drainage pattern fittings, with soldered joints.

1. Solder Filler Materials: ASTM B32, 50-50 tin-lead solder.

B. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings.

1. Clamps and compression gaskets: ASTM C564.

C. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and

fittings, with neoprene gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310. 2.3 UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Extra-Heavy weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or asphaltum on both inside and outside surfaces.

1. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.

2.4 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze fitted cast-iron, with bolted cover. Flapper shall provide a maximum 1/4 inch clearance between flapper and seat for air circulation. Valve ends shall suit piping material.

B. Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2 inch connections

matching piping system. Complying with ASSE 1018.


SECTION 15420


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 3 of 10

C. Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve, bronze bolts with wing nuts.

D. Cleanout Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head.

E. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame, with cleanout plug and adjustable round top as follows:

1. Nickel-Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns:

a. Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8 inch thick resilient floor finish. b. Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1 inch thick terrazzo floor finish. c. Exposed finish type, standard mill finish. d. Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish.

2. Cast-iron Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns:

a. Exposed flush type, standard mill finish. b. Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish.

F. Wall Cleanouts: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast-bronze or brass cleanout plug;

stainless steel cover including screws.

G. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required.

H. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron calking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron

threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast-bronze stack flashing sleeve for copper tubing.

I. Frost-Proof Vent Caps: Construct of galvanized iron, copper, or lead-coated copper, sized to

provide 1 inch air space between outside of vent pipe and inside of flashing collar extension.

J. Vandal-Proof Vent Caps: Cast-iron body full size of vent pipe, with calked base connection for cast-iron pipes, threaded base for steel pipes.

2.5 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor Drain: Cast-iron body and flashing collar with adjustable top, and tractor grate, rated for applicable vehicle loads with the following features:

1. Sediment bucket; 2. Adjustable extension; 3. Top as sprecified; 4. Vandal-proof top; 5. Flat bottom strainer; 6. Deep body; 7. Bottom outlet, inside calk.

2.6 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Trench Drains: Cast-iron shallow hub body and grate with end plates and gaskets, assembled in standard lengths for total length and width as required, tractor grated for applicable vehicle loads, with the following features:


SECTION 15420


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 4 of 10

1. Sediment bucket; 2. Flashing device; 3. Heel-proof grate; 4. Vandal-proof grate; 5. Backwater valve; 6. Convex grate; 7. Dome bottom strainer; 8. Bottom outlet, inside calk.

2.7 ROOF DRAINS

A. Roof drain type designations and sizes as required.

B. Roof Drain: Cast-iron body and combined flashing collar and gravel stop, cast-iron dome, with the following features:

1. Underdeck clamp; 2. 1-1/2 inch Extension; 3. Sump receiver; 4. Expansion Joint; 5. Deep sump body; 6. Vandal-proof dome; 7. Bottom outlet, inside calk.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to installations.

B. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain

connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be installed.

D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION FOUNDATION FOR UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAINS

A. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock, throughout the length of the pipe.

B. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes are to be laid

and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to required invert elevation.

C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe for 90-degrees (bottom 1/4 of the circumference). Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.

3.3 PIPE APPLICATIONS - ABOVE GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING


SECTION 15420


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 5 of 10

A. Install copper tube with cast bronze fittings for 3 inch and smaller, drainage and vent pipe.

B. Install hub-and-spigot, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe with lead and oakum calked joints for larger than 3 inch drainage and vent pipe.

C. Install hub-and-spigot, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe with compression gasket joints for

larger than 3 inch drainage and vent pipe.

D. Install hubless, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for larger than 3 inch drainage and vent pipe.

3.4 PIPE APPLICATIONS - BELOW GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING

A. Install hub-and-spigot, extra-heavy weight cast-iron, soil pipe and fittings with lead-and-oakum calked joints for 15 inch and smaller drainage pipe.

B. Install hub-and-spigot, extra-heavy weight, cast-iron, soil pipe and fittings with gasketed joints

for 15 inch and smaller drainage pipe. 3.5 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Copper Tubing: Solder joints in accordance with the procedures specified in AWS "Soldering Manual."

B. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: Make lead and oakum calked joints, compression joints, and hubless

joints in accordance with the recommendations in the CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, Chapter IV.

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as required.

B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not

permitted.

D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.

E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade

or floors. F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the

building. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

G. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal.


SECTION 15420


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 6 of 10

H. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings and floors, maintain the fire rated integrity.

I. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree wyes,

half-wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where the change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical, except use long-turn tees where two fixtures are installed back to back and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size, standard increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.

J. Install underground building drains to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance with

the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual. Lay underground building drains beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment required with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed.

K. Install building drain pitched down at minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) for piping 3

inch and smaller, and 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 4 inch and larger.

L. Extend building drain to connect to sewer piping, of size and in location required for service entrance to building.

M. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal through foundation wall for watertight installation.

N. Install 1 inch thick extruded polystyrene over underground building drain piping not under

building. Width of insulation shall extend minimum of 12" beyond each side of pipe. Install directly over, and center on pipe center line.


A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

B. Install hangers for horizontal piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod

sizes as required by current International Plumbing Codes and requirements of Governing Authorities:

3.8 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Install backwater valves in sanitary building drain piping as required, and as required by the plumbing code. For interior installation, provide cleanout cover flush to floor centered over backwater valve cover and of adequate size to remove valve cover for service.

B. Install expansion joints on vertical risers as required, and as required by the plumbing code.

C. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as required,

and:

1. as required by plumbing code;


SECTION 15420


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 7 of 10

2. at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees; 3. at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger piping; 4. at base of each vertical soil or waste stack.

D. Cleanouts Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types as

required.

E. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through waterproof membranes.

F. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Frost-Proof Vent Caps: Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1 inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS

A. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations required.

B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set tops of drains flush with

finished floor.

C. Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below to provide proper slope to drain coordinate with architectual drawing and other project discipline as revision.

D. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer.

E. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining

flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. F. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS

A. Install trap primers with piping pitched towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent). Adjust trap primer for proper flow.

3.11 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS

A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof membrane manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and

adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

C. Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. 3.12 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes; but in no case smaller than required by the plumbing code.

B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.


SECTION 15420


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 8 of 10


A. Inspections

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction, at least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the plumbing official.

a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before

concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to observe

the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code.

3. Reinspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make

the required corrections, and arrange for reinspected by the plumbing official. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official.

B. Piping System Test Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the

authority having jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems and parts of existing systems, which have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing, that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain tile, test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems upon completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping system, and fill with water to the point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the inspection starts, through completion of the inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, their connections shall be tested and proved gas and water-tight. Plug the stack openings on the roof and building drain where it leaves the building, and introduce air into the system equal to a pressure of 1" water column. Use a "U" tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without the introduction of additional air throughout the period of inspection. Inspect all plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action. 3.14 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris. 3.15 PROTECTION


SECTION 15420


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 9 of 10

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris,

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.



SECTION 15420


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 10 of 10


DIVISION 15 HYDRONIC PIPING

SECTION 15510


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 1 of 10


A. This Section includes piping systems for hot water heating, chilled water cooling, condenser water, make-up water for these systems, blow-down drain lines, and condensate drain piping. Piping materials and equipment specified in this Section include:

1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties; 2. Special duty valves; 3. hydronic specialties.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS). 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. 4-Pipe System: The 4-pipe system includes independent chilled water and hot water supply and return piping mains in a closed loop, connecting to the existing boilers and chillers to the terminal heat transfer units by means of primary/secondary piping loops. Circulation is accomplished by others. Design flow rates and water temperatures are specified in the various equipment specifications and schedules. Control sequences and temperature reset schedules are specified in the temperature control specifications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data, including rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties and accessories, and installation instructions for each hydronic specialty and special duty valve specified.

1. Furnish flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and calibrated plug valves,

based on manufacturer's testing.

B. Maintenance Data for hydronic specialties and special duty valves, for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 and Division-15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements."

C. Welders' certificates certifying that welders comply meet the quality requirements specified in

Quality Assurance below. D. Certification of compliance with ASTM and ANSI manufacturing requirements for pipe, fittings, and

specialties.

E. Reports specified in Part 3 of this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: comply with the provisions of the following:

1. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.

2. Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and


SECTION 15510


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 2 of 10

Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 3. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualification"

for qualifications for welding processes and operators. 4. International Mechanical Code. 1.6 EXTRA STOCK

A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish a sufficient quantity of chemical for initial system start-up and for preventative maintenance for one year from Substantial Completion.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Grooved Mechanical Joint Pipe, Fittings, and Couplings:

a. Victaulic Company of America.

2. Calibrated Plug Valves:

a. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. b. Taco, Inc.

3. Safety Relief Valves:

a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c. Spirax Sarco. d. Watts Regulator Co.

4. Pressure Reducing Valves:

a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. d. Taco, Inc.

5. Air Vents (manual and automatic):

a. Armstrong Machine Works. b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. c. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div. d. Spirax Sarco.

6. Diverting Fittings:

a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.


SECTION 15510


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 3 of 10

d. Taco, Inc.

7. Dielectric Waterway Fittings:

a. Victaulic Company of America

8. Dielectric Unions:

a. Perfection Corp. b. Watts Regulator Co.

2.2 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3 Article "PIPE APPLICATIONS" for identification of where the below materials are used.

B. Drawn Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

C. Annealed Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 120, Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe, plane ends.

2.3 FITTINGS

A. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.

B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded joints.

Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. C. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.

D. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 Ductile Iron; ASTM A 47 Grade

32510 Malleable Iron; ASTM A 53, Type F, or Types E or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.

E. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: consist of ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic rubber

gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

F. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.

G. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

H. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 150; raised ground face, bolt holes spot faced.

I. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the

following material group, end connection and facing:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt Welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

J. Unions: ANSI B16.39 malleable-iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints,


SECTION 15510


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 4 of 10

metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.

K. Dielectric Unions: Threaded or soldered end connections for the pipe materials in which installed;

constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent corrosion.

L. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with woven flexible bronze wire reinforcing protective jacket; minimum 150 psig working pressure, maximum 250 deg F operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded end connections to match equipment connected; and shall be capable of 3/4 inch misalignment.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 50-50, Tin-Lead, for condenser water, chilled water, and make-up water and drain piping.

B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 Tin-Antimony, for heating hot water and low pressure

steam piping.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg 1 (Silver).

1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.

D. Welding Materials: Comply, with Section II, Part C. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for

welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.

E. Gasket Material: thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled, and design

temperatures and pressures. 2.5 GENERAL DUTY VALVES

A. General duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 15 Section "General Duty Valves." Special duty valves are specified below by their generic name; refer to Part 3 Article "VALVE APPLICATION" for specific uses and applications for each valve specified.

2.6 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES

A. Calibrated Plug Valves: 125 psig water working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature, bronze body, plug valve with calibrated orifice. Provide with connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral check valves and seals. Valve shall have integral pointer and calibrated scale to register degree of valve opening. Valves 2 inch and smaller shall have threaded connections and 2-1/2 inch valves shall have flanged connections.

B. Pressure Reducing Valves: diaphragm operated, cast-iron or brass body valve, with low inlet

pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shut-down, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field adjustment.

C. Safety Relief Valves: 125 psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature;

designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of


SECTION 15510


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 5 of 10

the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber. Select valve to suit actual system pressure and Btu capacity.

D. Combined Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves: diaphragm operated, cast-iron or brass body

valve, with low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shut-down, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field adjustment. Safety relief valve designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber; 125 psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Select valve to suit actual system pressure and Btu capacity. Provide with fast fill feature for filling hydronic system.

E. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Class 150, cast iron housing, stainless steel operating parts;

threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller, flanged connections for 2-1/2 inch and larger. Factory set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operating pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment. Provide a metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and rate flow in GPM.

2.7 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Manual Air Vent: bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 225 deg F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; and having 1/8 inch discharge connection and 1/2 inch inlet connection.

B. Automatic Air Vent: designed to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and

nonferrous internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 240 deg F operating temperature; and having 1/4 inch discharge connection and 1/2 inch inlet connection.

C. Diverting Fittings: cast iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with solder ends; 125

psig working pressure, 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. Indicate flow direction on fitting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. Install Type L, drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for 2 inch and smaller, above ground, within building. Install Type K, annealed temper copper tubing for 2 inch and smaller without joints, below ground or within slabs.

B. Install steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings fittings for 2 inch and smaller, and with welded

joints for 2-1/2 inch and larger.

C. Install mechanical grooved end steel pipe with mechanical couplings and fittings for condenser water piping systems.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Locations and Arrangements: Locations and arrangements of piping shall take into consideration


SECTION 15510


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 6 of 10

pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical install piping.

B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted,

unless expressly indicated.

D. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors,

E. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the

building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1" clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

F. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of

valves. G. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball

valve, and short 3/4" threaded nipple and cap.

H. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal.

I. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and

floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.

J. Install piping at a uniform grade of 1 inch in 40 feet upward in the direction of flow.

K. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with the level side up.

L. Install branch connections to mains using Tee fittings in main with take-off out the bottom of the main, except for up-feed risers which shall have take-off out the top of the main line.

M. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each piece

of equipment, and elsewhere as required. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

N. Install dielectric unions to join dissimilar metals.

O. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger connections.

P. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps (except inline pumps) and other vibration producing equipment.

Q. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure reducing valve, pressure

regulating valve, solenoid valve, inline pump, and elsewhere as required. Install nipple and ball valve in blow down connection of strainers 2 inch and larger.

R. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. Expansion loops and joints

are required. 3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS


SECTION 15510


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 7 of 10

A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section "SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports:

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe roller complete - MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer, supported

on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

C. Install hangers in compliance with all Applicable Codes Standards and Local Governing Authorities.

D. Support vertical runs at each floor.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Soldering Manual."

B. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual."

1. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal parts at piping specialties before brazing.

2. Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas (ie., nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale.

3. Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform temperature.

C. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or

wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 2. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry

seal threading is specified). 4. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe

is being threaded.

a. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used.

D. Welded Joints: Comply with the requirement in ASME Code B31.9-"Building Services Piping."

E. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to

make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.

F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints in accordance with fitting manufacturers written instructions.

3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS


SECTION 15510


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 8 of 10

A. General Duty Valve Applications:

1. Shut-off duty: use gate, ball, and butterfly valves 2. Throttling duty: use globe, ball, and butterfly valves 3. Install shut-off duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, at supply connection

to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as required. 4. Install throttling duty valves at each branch connection to return mains, at return

connections to each piece of equipment, elsewhere Design Builder.

B. Install calibrated plug valves on the outlet of each heating or cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system balancing.

C. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required for

system drainage.

D. Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

E. Install pump discharge valves with stem in upward position; allow clearance above stem for check mechanism removal.

F. Install safety relief valves on hot water generators, and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe discharge to floor without valves. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Division 1 for installation requirements.

G. Install pressure reducing valves on hot water generators, and elsewhere as required to regulate

system pressure. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in the system, at heat transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points in the system, heat transfer coils, and elsewhere as

required for system air venting. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Preparation for testing: Prepare hydronic piping in accordance with ASME B 31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the reactions due to

test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. If a valve

is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against the test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested.

5. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher than the test pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of overpressure during the test.

B. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows:


SECTION 15510


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 9 of 10

1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except where there is a risk of

damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen and compatible with the piping system components.

2. Use vents installed at high points in the system to release trapped air while filling the system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of the that liquid.

3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low pressure filling lines are disconnected.

4. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, Code For Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping.

5. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.


A. Clean and flush hydronic piping systems. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove disposable fine mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.

B. Mark calibrated name plates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has been

completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.

C. Chemical Treatment: Provide a water analysis prepared by the chemical treatment supplier to determine the type and level of chemicals required for prevention of scale and corrosion. Preform initial treatment after completion of system testing.

3.9 COMMISSIONING

A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.

B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is completely full of water.

C. Before operating the system perform these steps:

1. Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass valves. 2. Remove and clean strainers. 3. Check pump for proper direction of correct improper wiring. 4. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure. 5. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type) or to bleed air completely (manual type). 6. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 7. Check operation of automatic bypass valves. 8. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design

requirements. 9. Lubricate motors and bearings.


SECTION 15510


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 10 of 10



DIVISION 15 AIR TERMINAL UNITS – VARIABLE VOLUME

SECTION 15840



PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single duct terminal units.

1. Variable volume.

B. Integral heating coils.

1. Hot water.

C. Integral terminal unit controls.

1. Direct digital.

1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. Section 15952 - Controls and Instrumentation: Thermostats and control components.

B. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Thermostats and control components.

1.03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION

A. None.

1.04 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 15510 - Hydronic Piping: Connections to heating coils.

B. Section 15515 - Hydronic Specialties: Connections to heating coils.

C. Section 15890 - Ductwork.

D. Section 15910 - Ductwork Accessories.

E. Section 15952 - Controls and Instrumentation.

F. Section 15936 - Air Outlets and Inlets.

G. Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical supply to units.

1.05 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.

B. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.


SECTION 15840



C. UL 1995, Heating and Cooling Equipment.

D. CUL C22.2 No. 236, Heating and Cooling Equipment.

E. ASTM A 527 (Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated Galvanized).

F. A-A-1419 or F-F-310 Federal specification (filter element, Air conditioning, Viscous-impingement or Dry type, replaceable), Tested per UL 900.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data sheets indicating configuration, general assembly, and materials used in fabrication.

B. Submit product performance data indicating design air flow, minimum static pressure drop, fan operating condition.

C. Submit sound power and noise criteria (NC) values for radiated and discharge paths.

1. Single and dual duct terminal units - correction to octave band sound power value.

OCTAVE BAND 2 3 4 5 6 7

Env. Adj. -3 -2 -1 -1 -1 -1

Mineral Fiber Ceiling Tile -9 -10 -12 -14 -15 -15

Space Effect Factor -10 -11 -12 -13 -13 -14

D. Submit installation, operation and maintenance documentation.

1.07 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: The company manufacturing the products specified in this section shall have a minimum of ten years experience producing products of this type.

1.08 SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY

A. The contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs associated with any and all changes resulting from the use of a supplier other than the one used as "basis of design".

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's parts warranty for one year from unit start-up or eighteen months from


SECTION 15840



unit shipment, whichever is shorter.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. General

1. Manufacturer shall participate in the ARI Certification program. Unit performance data shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 880. The manufacturer shall display the ARI Symbol on all units.

B. Specified Manufacturers

1. Trane

2. Environmental Technologies Inc

3. Titus Models

4. Tempmaster Models

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Single duct terminal units.

1. Ceiling mounted primary air control terminal units for connection to a single pressure duct of a central air distribution system. Terminals units may be provided with controls and integral heating coils.

B. Identify each terminal unit with clearly marked identification label and airflow indicator. Label shall include unit nominal air flow, maximum factory-set air flow, minimum factory-set air flow, and coil type.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Casings: Units shall be completely factory-assembled, manufactured of corrosion protected steel, and fabricated with a minimum of 18-gauge metal on the high pressure (inlet) side of the terminal unit damper and 22-gauge metal on the low pressure (outlet) side and unit casing.

B. Plenum air filters shall be provided on all fan powered units.

C. INSULATION - Matte Faced - The interior surface of unit casing acoustically and thermally lined with Insulation that shall meet NFPA-90A and UL 181 requirements. The cut edges on the discharge of the unit shall be covered by a metal flange.

D. Assembly: Primary air control damper, airflow sensor, fans, controls and optional heating coil in single cabinet.


SECTION 15840



E. Rectangular Supply Air Outlet Connections: Rectangular outlet connections for units without optional heating coils on the outlet of the terminal unit shall be flange type. Rectangular outlet connections for units with optional heating coils on the outlet of the terminal unit shall be Rectangular type.

2.04 PRIMARY AIR CONTROL DAMPER ASSEMBLY

A. Locate primary air control damper assembly inside unit casing. Construct the damper assembly from extruded aluminum and/or a minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel components. Maximum damper leak rate shall not exceed 1% of damper nominal CFM at 4 inch wg. differential.

B. Provide damper assembly with integral flow sensor. Flow sensor shall be provided regardless of control type. Flow sensor shall be a multi-point, averaging, ring or cross type. Bar or single point sensing type is not acceptable.

C. Terminal unit manufacturer shall provide and factory install damper actuator.

2.05 HEATING COILS

A. Hot Water Heating Coil: Coils shall be factory-installed and shall consist of aluminum plated fins and seamless copper tubes. Fins shall have full fin collars to provide accurate fin spacing and maximum fin-to-tube contact. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fin collars. Coils shall be leak tested under water to 450 psig pressure. Supply and return water connections shall be on the same side of the coil.

B. Capacity: Provide coils in capacities as scheduled on the drawings.

2.06 WIRING

A. Factory install and wire power line fusing, a disconnect switch and a 24 VAC transformer for control voltage on fan powered direct digital or electronic control units. Provide terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power source.

B. Factory wire fan to terminal strip.

C. Factory install and wire terminal unit. Install electrical components in control box with removable cover. Incorporate single point electrical connection to power source.

2.07 TESTING / VERIFICATION

A. Factory run test all fan-powered units.

B. Factory set and check all analog electronic and pneumatic controllers to within 5% of scheduled maximum and minimum settings. Base performance on tests conducted in accordance with ARI 880.

C. Maximum Casing Leakage: 1 percent of nominal air flow at 0.5 in wg inlet static pressure.

D. Maximum Damper Leakage: 1 percent of design air flow at 4 in wg inlet static pressure.


SECTION 15840



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Reset volume with damper operator attached to assembly allowing flow range modulation from 100 percent of design air flow to 25 percent nominal air flow for cooling only units and 30 percent for units with heating coils.



DIVISION 15 METAL DUCTWORK

SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 1 of 12


A. This Section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 10 inches water gage.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Sealing Requirements Definitions: For the purposes of duct systems sealing requirements specified in this Section, the following definitions apply:

1. Seams: A seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally (in the direction of airflow)

oriented edges of duct surface material occurring between two joints. All other duct surface connections made on the perimeter are deemed to be joints.

2. Joints: Joints include girth joints; branch and subbranch intersections; so-called duct collar tap-ins; fitting subsections; louver and air terminal connections to ducts; access door and access panel frames and jambs; duct, plenum, and casing abutments to building structures.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air moving and distribution equipment and other components of the air system. Changes or alterations to the layout or configuration of the duct system must be specifically approved in writing. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide the original design results without increasing the system total pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual

components, profiles, and finishes for the following items: 1. Duct Liner. 2. Sealing Materials. 3. Fire-Stopping Materials.

C. Shop drawings from duct fabrication shop, drawn to a scale not smaller than 1/4 inch equals 1

foot, on drawing sheets same size as the Contract Drawings, detailing:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.

2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes in plan view. For exhaust ducts systems, indicate the classification of the materials handled as defined in this Section.

3. Fittings. 4. Reinforcing details and spacing. 5. Seam and joint construction details. 6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 7. Terminal unit, coil, and humidifier installations. 8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment, vibration isolation, and

duct attachment.


SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 2 of 12

D. Coordination drawings for ductwork installation in accordance with Division 15 Section "Basic

Mechanical Requirements." In addition to the requirements specified in "Basic Mechanical Requirements" show the following:

1. Coordination with ceiling suspension members. 2. Spatial coordination with other systems installed in the same space with the duct systems. 3. Coordination of ceiling- and wall-mounted access doors and panels required to provide

access to dampers and other operating devices. 4. Coordination with ceiling-mounted lighting fixtures and air outlets and inlets.

E. Welding certificates including welding procedures specifications, welding procedures qualifications

test records, and welders' qualifications test records complying with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" below.

F. Record drawings including duct systems routing, fittings details, reinforcing, support, and installed

accessories and devices, in accordance with Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements" and Division 1.

G. Maintenance data for volume control devices, fire dampers, and smoke dampers, in accordance

with Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements" and Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1 "Sheet Metal Welding Code."

B. Qualify each welder in accordance with AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved.

Certify that their qualification is current.

C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards:

1. NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," except as indicated otherwise.

2. NFPA 96, "Standard for the Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors for Commercial Cooking Equipment," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for kitchen hood duct systems, except as indicated otherwise.

D. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to installation of duct systems erect mock-ups representing duct

systems pressure classifications greater than 2 inches. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of Work.

1. Locate mock-ups on the site. Mock-up may be a representative section of the actual duct

system. 2. Include the minimum number of each of the following features and fittings:

a. Five transverse joints. b. One access door. c. Two typical branch connections each with at least one elbow. d. Two typical flexible duct or flexible connector connections for each type duct and

apparatus.

3. Perform tests specified in "Field Quality Control." Modify mock-up construction and perform


SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 3 of 12

additional tests as required to achieve specified minimum acceptable results. 4. Obtain approval of mock-ups before beginning final fabrication. 5. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard

for judging completed unit of Work. 6. Demolish and remove mock-ups from Project site when directed.

7. Accepted mock-ups that form a part of the actual duct system may remain and become part of completed unit of Work.


A. Deliver sealant and fire-stopping materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle sealant fire-stopping materials in compliance with manufacturers'

recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.

C. Deliver and store stainless steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper, maintained

through fabrication and installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Sheet Metal, General: Provide sheet metal in thicknesses indicated, packaged and marked as specified in ASTM A 700.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 527, Coating Designation G 90. Provide

mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

C. PVC-Coated Galvanized Steel: UL-181 Class 1 Listing. Lock-forming quality galvanized sheet steel with ASTM A 527, Coating Designation G 90. Provide with factory-applied, 4-mil, PVC coating on the exposed surfaces of ducts and fittings (exterior of ducts and fittings for underground applications, and the interior of ducts and fittings for fume-handing applications) and 2-mil PVC coating on the reverse side of the ducts and fittings.

D. Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366, cold-rolled sheets, commercial quality, with oiled, exposed

matte finish.

E. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480, Type 316, sheet form, with No. 4 finish on exposed surface for ducts exposed to view; Type 304, sheet form, with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.

F. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14, sheet form; with standard, one-side

bright finish where ducts are exposed to view, and mill finish for concealed ducts.

G. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide galvanized steel reinforcing where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. For aluminum and stainless steel ducts provide reinforcing of compatible materials.

H. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.


SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 4 of 12

2.2 DUCT LINER

A. General: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and TIMA Standard AHC-101.

B. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type II, with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Thickness: 1 inch. 3. Thickness: 1-1/2 inch. 4. Density: 1-1/2 pounds. 5. Density: 2 pounds. 6. Density: 3 pounds. 7. Thermal Performance: "K-Factor" equal to 0.28 or better, at a mean temperature of 75 deg

F. 8. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread rating of not more than 25 without evidence of

continued progressive combustion and a smoke developed rating of no higher than 50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 411.

9. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and ASTM C 916. 10. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical

attachment, or welding attachment to duct. Provide fasteners that do not damage the liner when applied as recommended by the manufacturer, that do not cause leakage in the duct, and will indefinitely sustain a 50-pound tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall.

a. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation, and without projecting

more than 1/8 inch into the airstream. b. Adhesive For Attachment of Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with the "Fire Hazard

Classification" of duct liner system. 2.3 SEALING MATERIALS

A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term sealant used here is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature, but also includes tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics.

B. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide, glass-fiber-fabric reinforced.

C. Tape Sealing System: Woven-fiber tape impregnated with a gypsum mineral compound and a

modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with the tape to form a hard, durable, airtight seal.

D. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant

complying with FS TT-S-001657, Type I; formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

E. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric joint sealants, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

2.4 FIRE-STOPPING

A. Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide two-part, foamed-in-place, fire-stopping silicone sealant formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and


SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 5 of 12

inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Resistant Sealant: Provide one-part elastomeric sealant formulated for use in a through-penetration fire-stop system for filling openings around duct penetrations through walls and floors, having fire-resistance ratings indicated as established by testing identical assemblies per ASTM E 814 by Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated

in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam"; Dow Corning Corp. 2. "Pensil 851"; General Electric Co.

3. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant"; Dow Corning Corp. 4. "3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP-25"; Electrical Products Div./3M. 5. "RTV 7403"; General Electric Co. 6. "Fyre Putty"; Standard Oil Engineered Materials Co.


A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder actuated fasteners, or structural steel fasteners appropriate for building materials. Do not use powder actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

B. Hangers: Galvanized sheet steel, or round, uncoated steel, threaded rod.

1. Hangers Installed In Corrosive Atmospheres: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rod or hot-dipped-galvanized rods with threads painted after installation.

2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Conform with Table 4-1 in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1985 Edition, for sheet steel width and gage and steel rod diameters.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with

duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A 36.

1. Where galvanized steel ducts are installed, provide hot-dipped-galvanized steel shapes and plates.

2. For stainless steel ducts, provide stainless steel support materials. 3. For aluminum ducts, provide aluminum support materials, except where materials are

electrolytically separated from ductwork. 2.6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Tables 1-3 through 1-19, including their associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class

required for pressure classification. 2. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller

marks, stains, and discolorations.

B. Static Pressure Classifications: Except where otherwise indicated, construct duct systems to the


SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 6 of 12

following pressure classifications:

1. Supply Ducts: 3 inches water gage. 2. Return Ducts: 2 inches water gage, negative pressure. 3. Exhaust Ducts: 2 inches water gage, negative pressure.

C. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 inches and larger

and are 20 gage or less, with more than 10 sq. ft. of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standard," Figure 1-4, unless they are lined or are externally insulated.

2.7 RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS

A. Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," 1985 Edition, Figures 2-1 through 2-10.

2.8 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness is prohibited.

B. Apply a coat of adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to assure butted edge

overlapping.

E. Longitudinal joints in rectangular ducts shall not occur except at corners of ducts, unless the size of the duct and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

1. Apply an adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts exceeding 2,500 FPM air velocity.

F. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12

inches transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

G. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that are either

channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from the duct wall at the following locations:

1. Fan discharge. 2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

3. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts.

H. Secure insulation liner with perforated sheet metal liner of the same gage specified for the duct, secured to ducts with mechanical fasteners that maintain metal liner distance from duct without compressing insulation. Provide 3/32-inch-diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent.

I. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies,


SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 7 of 12

and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to the duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire damper sleeve through fire separation.

2.9 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCT FABRICATION

A. General: "Basic Round Diameter" as used in this article is the diameter of the size of round duct that has a circumference equal to the perimeter of a given sized of flat oval duct. Except where interrupted by fittings, provide round and flat oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet.

B. Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts with spiral lockseam construction, except where

diameters exceed 72 inches. Fabricate ducts having diameters greater than 72 inches with longitudinal butt-welded seams. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-2 for galvanized steel gages.

C. Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts using seam types identified in SMACNA "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards," 1985 Edition, Figure 3-1, RL-1, RL-4, or RL-5. Seams Types RL-2 or RL-3 may be used if spot-welded on 1-inch intervals. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-2 for galvanized steel gages.

D. Flat Oval Ducts: Fabricate flat oval supply ducts with standard spiral lockseams (without

intermediate ribs) or with butt-welded longitudinal seams in gages listed in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-4.

E. Double-Wall (Insulated) Ducts: Fabricate double-wall insulated ducts with an outer shell,

insulation, and an inner liner as specified below. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are nominal inside dimensions.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu/sq.ft./deg F/inch thickness at 75 deg F mean temperature. 2. Outer Shell: Base outer shell gage on actual outer shell dimensions. Provide outer shell

lengths 2 inches longer than inner shell and insulation, and in gages specified above for single-wall duct.

3. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1-inch-thick fiber-glass insulation. Provide insulation ends where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or noninsulated components. The insulation end shall terminate the insulation and reduce the outer shell diameter to the inner liner diameter.

4. Solid Inner Liner: Construct round and flat oval inner liners with solid sheet metal of the gages listed below. For flat oval ducts, the diameter indicated in the table below is the "basic round diameter."

5. Perforated Inner Liner: Construct round and flat oval inner liners with perforated sheet metal of the gages listed below. Provide 3/32-inch-diameter perforations, with an overall open area of 23 percent. For flat oval ducts, the diameter indicated below is the "basic round diameter."

a. 3 to 8 inches: 28 gage with standard spiral construction. b. 9 to 42 inches: 28 gage with single-rib spiral construction. c. 44 to 60 inches: 26 gage with single-rib spiral construction. d. 62 to 88 inches: 22 gage with standard spiral construction.

6. Maintain concentricity of liner to outer shell by mechanical means. Retain insulation from

dislocation by mechanical means. 2.10 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTINGS FABRICATION


SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 8 of 12

A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to conform to SMACNA "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards," 1985 Edition, Figures 3-4 and 3-5 and with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam straight duct.

B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material

projecting from the body onto branch tap entrance.

C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate the bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows 1.5 times the elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, provide elbows meeting the following requirements:

1. Mitered Elbows: Fabricate mitered elbows with welded construction in gages specified

below.

a. Mitered Elbows Radius and Number of Pieces: Unless otherwise indicated, construct elbow to comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-1.

b. Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with metal thickness listed below for pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 2 inches:

1 3 to 26 inches: 24 gage. 2 27 to 36 inches: 22 gage. 3 37 to 50 inches: 20 gage. 4 52 to 60 inches: 18 gage. 5 62 to 84 inches: 16 gage.

c. Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with metal thickness listed below for

pressure classes from 2 inches to 10 inches:

1 3 to 14 inches: 24 gage. 2 15 to 26 inches: 22 gage. 3 27 to 50 inches: 20 gage. 4 52 to 60 inches: 18 gage. 5 62 to 84 inches: 16 gage.

d. Flat Oval Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with the same metal thickness as

longitudinal seam flat oval duct. e. 90-Degree, 2-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust

systems for material handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit the use of 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with a single-thickness turning vanes.

2 Round Elbows - 8 Inches and Smaller: Die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows

and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 3-1/2- and 4-1/2-inch) elbows with gored construction.

3 Round Elbows - 9 Through 14 Inches: Gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, except where space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 9-1/2- and 10-1/2-inch) elbows with gored construction.

4 Round Elbows - Larger Than 14 Inches and All Flat Oval Elbows: Gored elbows, except where space restrictions require a mitered elbow.


SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 9 of 12

5 Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes Through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 20 gage with 2-piece welded construction.

6 Round Gored Elbows Gages: Same as for nonelbow fittings specified above. 7 Flat Oval Elbows Gages: Same as longitudinal seam flat oval duct. 8 Pleated Elbows Sizes Through 14 Inches and Pressures Through 10 Inches: 26 gage.

D. Double-Wall (Insulated) Fittings: Fabricate double-wall insulated fittings with an outer shell,

insulation, and an inner liner as specified below. Dimensions indicated on internally insulated ducts are nominal inside dimensions.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu/sq.ft./deg F/inch thickness at 75 deg F mean temperature. 2. Outer Shell: Base outer shell gage on actual outer shell dimensions. Provide outer shell

lengths 2 inches longer than inner shell and insulation. Gages for outer shell shall be same as for uninsulated fittings specified above.

3. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1-inch-thick fiber-glass insulation. Provide insulation ends where internally insulated duct connects to single-wall duct or noninsulated components. The insulation end shall terminate the insulation and reduce the outer shell diameter to the nominal single-wall size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.

B. Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.

C. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into duct at connections kept to a

minimum. E. Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular

to building lines; avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment.

F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

G. Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, plus allowance for insulation thickness, if any.

H. Install insulated ducts with 1-inch clearance outside of insulation.

I. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow

wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown.

J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults and

electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.


SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 10 of 12

L. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass interior partitions and exterior walls, and

are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. General: Seal duct seams and joints as follows:

B. Pressure Classifications Greater Than 3 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct penetrations.

C. Pressure Classification 2 and 3 Inches Water Gage: All transverse joints and longitudinal seams.

1. Pressure Classification Less than 2 Inches Water Gage: Transverse joints only.

D. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation. 3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Tables 4-1 through 4-3 and Figures 4-1 through 4-8.

B. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch intersection.

C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.

D. Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 1/4 of the failure

(proof test) load but are not limited to the specific methods indicated.

E. Install concrete insert prior to placing concrete.

F. Install powder actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in accordance with Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2-7

and 2-8.

C. Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figures 2-16 through 2-18.

D. Terminal Units Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Figure

2-19. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. The Owner will contract with an independent testing agency to perform, record, and report leakage tests.

B. Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified maximum allowable

leakage.


SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 11 of 12


A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of the systems as required to accommodate leakage testing, and as required for compliance with test requirements.

B. Conduct tests, in the presence of the Owner/Owner’s Representative, at static pressures equal to

the maximum design pressure of the system or the section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at the maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above the maximum design operating pressure. Give 7 days' advanced notice for testing.

C. Determine leakage from entire system or section of the system by relating leakage to the surface

area of the test section.

D. Maximum Allowable Leakage: As described in ASHRAE 1989 Handbook, "Fundamentals" Volume, Chapter 32, Table 6 and Figure 10. Comply with requirements for leakage classification 3 for round and flat oval ducts, leakage classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2 inches water gage (both positive and negative pressures), and leakage classification 6 for pressure classifications greater than 2 inches water gage and less than and equal to 10 inches water gage.

E. Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified maximum allowable

leakage.

F. Leakage Test: Perform volumetric measurements and adjust air systems as described in ASHRAE 1987 "HVAC Systems and Applications" Volume, Chapter 57 and ASHRAE 1989 "Fundamentals" Volume, Chapter 13, and Division 15 Section "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING."


A. Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and balancing procedures to achieve required air flow. Refer to Division 15 Section "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING" for requirements and procedures for adjusting and balancing air systems.

B. Vacuum ducts systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris.



SECTION 15891


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 12 of 12


DIVISION 15 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 1 of 20

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.

B. LAN: Local area network.

C. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing.

D. PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.

B. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems.

1.5 Sequence of Operation EMS NETWORK:


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 2 of 20

THE NEW ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (EMS) SHALL BE TAC I/A SERIES AND SHALL BE INTEGRATED WITH THE EXISTING INVENSYS/TAC I/A EMS SYSTEM PRESENTLY SERVING CCSU. A NEW UNIVERSAL NETWORK CONTROLLERS (UNC) SHALL BE LOCATED IN THE BUILDING. ALL DIGITAL CONTROLLERS IN THE BUILDING SHALL BE NETWORKED TO THE UNC THROUGH HARDWIRED COMMUNICATION CABLE. WEB BASED DYNAMIC COLOR GRAPHICS OF ALL SYSTEMS SHALL BE PROVIDED AT THE UNC. THESE GRAPHICS SHALL INCLUDE REAL POINT DISPLAY AND DIRECT SOFTWARE COMMUNICATION FOR SETPOINT AND PROGRAM OVERRIDE. IN ADDITION, A BUILDING GRAPHIC SHALL BE PROVIDED, WITH CURSOR BLOCKS FOR ACCESS TO THE RESPECTIVE SYSTEMS. NEW VAV SYSTEM CONTROL: SYSTEM SHALL BE DDC WITH ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC END DEVICES. SYSTEM SHALL BE INDEXED OCC/UNOCC & WARM-UP/COOL-DOWN BY THE OPTIMAL START PROGRAM IN THE EMS SYSTEM. WARM-UP/COOL-DOWN: SYSTEM SUPPLY AND RETURN FANS SHALL START SUBJECT TO PREHEAT COIL DISCHARGE LOW TEMPERATURE THERMOSTAT AND SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCT SMOKE DETECTORS. WHEN THE FANS RUN, THE OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER SHALL REMAIN CLOSED. IN THE WARMUP MODE, THE AVERAGE SPACE TEMPERATURE SHALL RESET THE DISCHARGE AIR BY MODULATING THE PREHEAT COIL 2-WAY HOT WATER CONTROL VALVE TO MAINTAIN THE FOLLOWING SCHEDULE: AVG. SPACE TEMP. DISCH. AIR TEMP. 60 74 80 68 IN THE COOLDOWN MODE, THE AVERAGE SPACE TEMPERATURE SHALL RESET THE DISCHARGE AIR BY MODULATING THE CHILLED WATER COIL 2-WAY CONTROL VALVE TO MAINTAIN THE FOLLOWING SCHEDULE:


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 3 of 20

AVG. SPACE TEMP. DISCH. AIR TEMP. 60 70 80 55 SPACE SENSOR SHALL MODULATE VAV BOX TO MAINTAIN COOLING SETPOINT. ON REDUCED COOLING LOAD, BOX SHALL MODULATE TO MINIMUM. ON A FURTHER DROP,VAV BOX SHALL OPEN TO REHEAT MINIMUM POSITION AND 2-WAY REHEAT VALVE SHALL MODULATE OPEN TO MAINTAIN HEATING SETPOINT. THE H.W. RADIATION VALVE (WHERE APPLICABLE)WILL BE CONTROLLED BY THE RESPECTIVE ZONE SENSOR. SETPOINT DEVIATION SOFTWARE SHALL BE PROVIDED TO ALLOW FOR DIFFERENT SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT WITHOUT FALSELY BIASING RESET SCHEDULE. THE SUPPLY AND RETURN FANS SHALL EACH BE FURNISHED WITH A VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE WHICH SHALL BE FURNISHED BY THE AHU EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. SUPPLY AIR STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR SHALL MODULATE SUPPLY FAN VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE. RETURN FAN VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE SHALL MODULATE THROUGH ACCELERATED DOWNTURN ALGORITHM. OCCUPIED: SUPPLY AND RETURN FANS CONTINUE TO RUN, AND OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER OPENS TO MINIMUM. THE AVERAGE SPACE TEMPERATURE SHALL RESET THE DISCHARGE AIR BY MODULATING THE PREHEAT COIL 2-WAY HOT WATER VALVE IN SEQUENCE WITH THE OUTSIDE/RETURN/RELIEF AIR DAMPERS THROUGH IDEAL DRY BULB SWITCHOVER AND MIXED AIR LOW LIMIT,ALL IN SEQUENCE WITH 2-WAY CHILLED WATER CONTROL VALVE TO MAINTAIN THE FOLLOWING SCHEDULE: AVG. SPACE TEMP. DISCH. AIR TEMP. 60 67 70 55 SPACE SENSOR SHALL MODULATE VAV BOX TO MAINTAIN COOLING SETPOINT. ON REDUCED COOLING LOAD, BOX SHALL MODULATE TO MINIMUM. ON A FURTHER DROP, VAV BOX SHALL OPEN TO REHEAT MINIMUM POSITION AND 2-WAY REHEAT VALVE SHALL MODULATE OPEN TO MAINTAIN HEATING SETPOINT. THE H.W. RADIATION VALVE (WHERE APPLICABLE)WILL BE CONTROLLED BY THE RESPECTIVE ZONE SENSOR. SETPOINT DEVIATION SOFTWARE SHALL BE PROVIDED TO ALLOW FOR


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 4 of 20

DIFFERENT SETPOINT ADJUSTMENT WITHOUT FALSELY BIASING RESET SCHEDULE. SUPPLY AIR STATIC PRESSURE SENSOR SHALL MODULATE SUPPLY FAN VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE. RETURN FAN VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE SHALL MODULATE THROUGH ACCELERATED DOWNTURN ALGORITHM. UNOCCUPIED: H.W. RADIATION VALVE SHALL CYCLE TO MAINTAIN 60F SETBACK TEMPERATURE.AHU SHALL CYCLE IN THE WARMUP MODE IF ANY SPACE SENSOR TEMPERATURE DROPS BELOW 58F.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. Each control device labeled with setting or adjustable range of control.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

3. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 4. Written description of sequence of operation. 5. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 6. Schedule of valves including leakage and flow characteristics. 7. Trunk cable schematic showing programmable control unit locations and trunk data

conductors. 8. Listing of connected data points, including connected control unit and input device. 9. System graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point

addresses, and operator notations.


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 5 of 20

10. System configuration showing peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, diagrams, modems, and interconnections.

C. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data

files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.

D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.

E. Maintenance Data: For systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed-air station.

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices.

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points.

F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including control units, thermostats, and sensors. Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and operating sequences.


A. Installer Qualifications: System shall be Invnsys and shall be furnished and installed by SNE Building Systems.


A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to unit manufacturer.

1.9 COORDINATION


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 6 of 20

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Control Systems and DDC Components:

a. Invensys TAC/IA

b. No substitutions.

C. Application Software: Include the following:

1. Input/output capability from operator station. 2. Operator system access levels via software password. 3. Database creation and support. 4. Dynamic color graphic displays. 5. Alarm processing. 6. Event processing. 7. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power. 8. Data collection. 9. Graphic development on workstation.

D. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; integral interface equipment; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator station.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and

controlled environment.


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 7 of 20

2.2 SENSORS

A. Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.

1. Thermistor temperature sensors as follows:

a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. b. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. c. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 18 inches long; use where not affected

by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. d. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to

temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required.

e. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches.

f. Room Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security screws and no pushbutton override. .

2. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.

a. Accuracy: 5 percent full range with linear output. b. Room Sensors: With locking cover matching room thermostats, span of 25 to 90

percent relative humidity. c. Duct and Outside-Air Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0

to 100 percent relative humidity.

B. Equipment operation sensors as follows: 1. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers,

adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.

C. Carbon-Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors, using solid-state infrared sensors, suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F, calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4 to 20 mA output, and wall mounted.

D. Electric Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual- or automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 12 inches of bulb length is equal to or below set point.

1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet. 2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. of coil surface.

2.3 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 8 of 20

action or two-position action.

1. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

2. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

3. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

B. Electronic Damper Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.

1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close-off at maximum pump differential pressure.

2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper. c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-pounds/sq. ft of damper. d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper. e. Dampers with 2 to 3 Inches wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to

2500 FPM: Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 1.5. f. Dampers with 3 to 4 Inches wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to

3000 FPM: Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 2.0.

3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

2.4 CONTROL VALVES

A. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Globe Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.

C. Globe Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.

D. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 9 of 20

1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel or brass.

a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom of guided plugs.

b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom of guided plugs.

3. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate. 4. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-

way valves shall have linear characteristics. Operators shall close valves against pump shutoff head.

E. Steam system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:

1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel.

a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom of guided plugs.

b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom of guided plugs.

3. Sizing: 10-psig inlet pressure and 5-psig pressure drop. 4. Sizing: Pressure drop across steam valve at a maximum flow of 80 percent of inlet

pressure for low-pressure systems and 42 percent for high-pressure systems. 5. Flow Characteristics: Modified linear characteristics.

F. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two- or three-port as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, union and threaded ends.

1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions. 2. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff

head. 3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-

way valves shall have linear characteristics.

2.5 DAMPERS

A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.1084-inch minimum, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than 0.0635-inch galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8 inches.

1. Blades shall be secured to 1/2-inch- diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 10 of 20

brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging. 4. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable seal

blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 inches wg when damper is being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

2.6 CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic and Fiber-Optic Cable for Control Wiring: As specified in Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."Plenum Rated Cable neatly affixed to building structure shall be used above accessible ceilings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units and operator workstation.

B. Verify that duct-, pipe-, and equipment-mounted devices and wiring are installed before proceeding with installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb.

B. Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

C. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

D. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate all 60 inches above the floor.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

E. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.

F. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 15 Section


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 11 of 20

"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

G. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."

3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 16 Section "Raceways and Boxes."

B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 16 Section "Control/Signal Transmission Media."

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.

2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in accessible ceilings. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where

several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against

abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control

system, except local individual room control cables.

D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

B. Ground equipment.

1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 12 of 20


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing. 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment, and retest. 3. Calibration test electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating

operation with compatible signal generator.

B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

1. Start, test, and adjust control systems. 2. Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and testing, and control

sequences. 3. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence of operation

specified.

D. Verify DDC as follows:

1. Verify software including automatic restart, control sequences, scheduling, reset controls, and occupied/unoccupied cycles.

2. Verify operation of operator workstation. 3. Verify local control units including self-diagnostics.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain control systems and components.

1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment and schedules.

2. Provide operator training on data display, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data, executing commands, calibrating and adjusting devices, resetting default values, and requesting logs. Include a minimum of 4 hours' dedicated instructor time on-site.

3. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout." 4. Review data in maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and

Maintenance Data." 5. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance

notice.


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 13 of 20

3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE

A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three Project site visits, when requested by Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes and in adjusting sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.

ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (AFD) MANUFACTURERS 4. Cutler-Hammer Model HVX-9000 with LON Card Naming specific vendors does not imply acceptance of their standard products relieve them from meeting these specifications in their entirety. ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (AFD) 1. Where shown on the drawings, adjustable frequency drives 1 through 400 Hp shall have the fol-

lowing features:

1 The AFDs shall be rated for 480 Vac (optional input voltages of 208,240, and 575 Vac). The AFD shall provide microprocessor based control for three-phase induction motors. The controller’s full load output current rating shall be based on variable torque applica-tion at 40�C ambient and 10 kHz switching frequency below 40 Hp and 3.6 kHz 40 Hp and above to reduce motor noise and avoid increased motor losses.

2 The AFD shall be of the Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) design converting the utility input

voltage and frequency to a variable voltage and frequency output via a two-step opera-tion. Adjustable Current Source AFDs are not acceptable. Insulated Gate Bipolar Tran-sistors (IGBTs) shall be used in the inverter section. Bipolar Junction Transistors, GTOs or SRCs are not acceptable. The AFDs shall run at the above listed switching frequen-cies.

3 The AFDs shall have an efficiency at full load and speed that exceeds 95% for AFDs be-

low 15 Hp and 97% for drives 15 Hp and above. The efficiency shall exceed 90% at 50% speed and load.

4 The AFDs shall maintain the line side displacement power factor at no less than 0.96, re-

gardless of speed and load.

5 The AFDs shall have one (1) minute overload current rating of 110% for variable toque applications.


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 14 of 20

6 The AFDs shall be capable of operating any NEMA design B squirrel cage induction mo-tor, regardless of manufacturer, with a horsepower and current rating within the capacity of the AFD.

7 The AFDs shall limit harmonic distortion reflected onto the utility system to a voltage and

current level as defined by IEEE 519 for general systems applications, by utilizing the standard 3% nominal impedance integral ac three-phase line reactor.

8 Any harmonic calculations shall be done based on the kVA capacity, X/R ratio and the

impedance of the utility transformer feeding the installation, as noted on the drawings, and the total system load. The calculations shall be made with the point of common cou-pling being the point where the utility feeds multiple customers.

9 Total harmonic distortion shall be calculated under worst case conditions in accordance

with the procedure outlined in IEEE standard 519-1992.

10 The system containing the AFDs shall comply with the 5% level of total harmonic distor-tion of line voltage and the line current limits as defined in IEEE 519-1992. If the system cannot meet the harmonic levels with the AFDs provided with the standard input line re-actor or optional input isolation transformer, the AFD manufacturer shall supply an eight-een pulse, multiple bridge rectifier ac to dc conversion section with phase shifting trans-former for all drives above 75 Hp. This eighteen pulse rectifier converter shall result in a multiple pulse current waveform that will more nearly approximate a true sinewave to re-duce voltage harmonic content on the utility line. The phase shifting transformer shall be of a single winding type to optimize its KVA rating and harmonic cancellation capability.

11 The AFDs shall be able to start into a spinning motor. The AFDs shall be able to deter-mine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping. If the motor is spinning in the reverse direction, the AFDs shall start into the motor in the reverse di-rection, bring the motor to a controlled stop, and then accelerate the motor to the present speed.

12 Standard operating conditions shall be:1

1. Incoming Power: Three-phase, 208/240/480/575 Vac (+10% to -15%) and

50/60 Hz (=/-5 Hz) power to a fixed potential DC bus level.

2. Frequency stability of +/-0.05% for 24 hours with voltage regulation of +/-1% of maximum rated output voltage.

3. Speed regulated of +/-0.5% of base speed.

4. Load inertia dependant carryover (ridethrough) during utility loss.


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 15 of 20

5. Insensitive to input line rotation.

6. Humidity: 0 to 95% (non-condensing and non-corrosive).

7. Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet ( 1000 meters) above sea level.

8. Ambient Temperature: -10 to 40�C (VT).

9. Storage Temperature: -40 to 60�C.

13 Control Functions

1. Frequently accessed AFD programmable parameters shall be adjustable from a digital operator keypad located on the front of the AFD. The AFDs shall have 3 line alphanumeric programmable display with status indicators. Keypads must use plain English words for parameters, status, and diagnostic messages. Key-pads that are difficult to read or understand are not acceptable, and particularly those that use alphanumeric code and tables. Keypads shall be adjustable for contrast with large characters easily visible in normal ambient light.

2. Standard advanced programming and trouble-shooting functions shall be availa-

ble by using a personal computer’s RS-232 port and Windows� based software. In addition the software shall permit control and monitoring via the AFDs RS232 port. The manufacturer shall supply a diskette with the required software. An easily understood instruction manual and software help screens shall also be provided.

3. The operator shall be able to scroll through the keypad menu to choose between the following:

1. Monitor 2. Operate 3. Parameter setup 4. Parameter actual parameter values 5. Active faults 6. Fault history 7. LCD contrast adjustment 8. Information to indicate the standard software and optional features soft-

ware loaded.

D. The following setups and adjustments, at a minimum, are to be available:

1. Start command from keypad, remote or communications port 2. Speed command from keypad, remote or communications port


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 16 of 20

3. Motor direction selection 4. Maximum and minimum speed limits 5. Acceleration and deceleration times, two settable ranges 6. Critical (skip) frequency avoidance 7. Torque limit 8. Multiple attempt restart function 9. Multiple preset speeds adjustment 10. Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection 11. Programmable analog output 12. Proportional/Integral process controller

14 The AFDs shall have the following system interfaces:

1. Inputs- A minimum of six(6) programmable digital inputs, two (2) analog inputs

and serial communications interface shall be provided with the following available as a minimum:

1. Remote manual/auto 2. Remote start/stop 3. Remote forward/reverse 4. Remote present speed 5. Remote external trip 6. Remote fault reset 7. Process control speed reference interface, 4-20mAdc 8. Potentiometer or process control speed reference interface, 1-10Vdc 9. RS232 programming and operation interface port

2. Outputs- A minimum of two (2) discrete programmable digital outputs, one (1)

programmable open collector output, and one (1) programmable analog output shall be provided, with the following available at minimum:

1. Programmable relay outputs with one (1) set of form C contacts for each,

selectable with the following available at minimum:

1. Fault 2. Run 3. Ready 4. Reversing 5. Jogging 6. At speed 7. In torque limit 8. Motor rotation direction opposite of command 9. Overtemperature

2. Programmable open collector output with available 24Vdc power supply

and selectable with the following available at minimum:


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 17 of 20

1. Fault 2. Run 3. Ready 4. Reversing 5. Jogging 6. At speed 7. In torque limit 8. Motor rotation direction opposite of command 9. Overtemperature

3. Programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following availa-

ble at minimum:

10. Output current 11. Output frequency 12. Motor speed 13. Motor torque 14. Motor power 15. Motor voltage 16. DC link voltage

15 Monitoring and Displays

A. The AFD’s display shall be a LCD type capable of displaying three (3) lines of

text and the following thirteen (13) status indicators:

1. Run 2. Forward 3. Reverse 4. Stop 5. Ready 6. Alarm 7. Fault 8. Local 9. Panel 10. Remote 11. Hand 12. Auto 13. Off

B. The AFD’s keypad shall be capable of displaying the following monitoring func-

tions at a minimum:

1. Output frequency 2. Output speed


SECTION 15900


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 18 of 20

3. Motor current 4. Motor torque 5. Motor power 6. Motor voltage 7. DC-link voltage 8. Heatsink temperature 9. Total operating days counter 10. Operating hours (resetable) 11. Total megawatt hours 12. Megawatt hours (resetable) 13. Voltage level of analog input 14. Current level of analog input 15. Digital inputs status 16. Digital and relay outputs status 17. Motor temperature rise, percentage of allowable

16 Protective Functions

1. The AFD shall include the following protective features at minimum:

1. Overcurrent 2. Overvoltage 3. Inverter vault 4. Undervoltage 5. Phase loss 6. Output phase loss 7. Undertemperature 8. Overtemperature 9. Motor stalled 10. Motor overtemperature 11. Motor underload 12. Logic voltage failure 13. Microprocessor failure 14. DC injection braking


SECTION 15900



B. The AFD shall provide ground fault protection during power-up, starting, and run-ning. AFD’s with no ground fault protection during running are not acceptable.

17 Diagnostic Features

A. Fault History.

1. Record and log faults 2. Indicate the most recent first, and store up to 9 faults.



SECTION 15900




DIVISION 15 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

SECTION 15910



PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:

1. Dampers.

a. Low pressure manual dampers. b. Control dampers. c. Counterbalanced relief dampers.

2. Fire and smoke dampers. 3. Turning vanes. 4. Duct hardware. 5. Duct access doors. 6. Flexible connections.

B. Refer to other Division-15 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork accessories;

not work of this section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". 2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of

ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated. 3. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard

555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers". 4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.


SECTION 15910



1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of ductwork

accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and methods of assembly of components.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of

duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DAMPERS:

A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Control Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades for 2- position control, or opposed blades

for modulating control. Construct blades of 16-ga steel, provide heavy-duty molded self- lubricating nylon bearings, 1/2" diameter steel axles spaced on 9" centers. Construct frame of 2" x 1/2" x 1/8" steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft. and under; 4" x 1-1/4" x 16-ga channel for face areas over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish with aluminum touch-up.

C. Control Dampers: Refer to Division-15 section "Control Systems" for control dampers; not work of

this section.

D. Counterbalanced Relief Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades, counterbalanced and factory-set to relieve at indicated static pressure. Construct blades of 16-ga aluminum, provide 1/2" diameter ball bearings, 1/2" diameter steel axles spaced on 9" centers. Construct frame of 2" x 1/2" x 1/8" steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft. and under; 4" x 1-1/4" x 16-ga channel for face areas over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish on frame with aluminum touch-up.

E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

dampers which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. Airguide Corp. 3. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc. 4. Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. 5. Penn Ventilator Co. 6. Ruskin Mfg. Co.


SECTION 15910



2.2 FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS:

A. Fabricated Fire Dampers: Provide dampers constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Fire Dampers and Heat Stop Guide".

B. Fire Dampers: Provide fire dampers, of types and sizes indicated. Construct casings of 11-ga

galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish. Provide fusible link rated at 160 to 165 degrees F (71 to 74 degrees C) unless otherwise indicated. Provide damper with positive lock in closed position, and with the following additional features:

1. Damper Blade Assembly: Single-blade type. 2. Damper Blade Assembly: Multi-blade type. 3. Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain type.

4. Blade Material: Steel, match casing. 5. Blade Material: Stainless steel.

C. Fire/Smoke Dampers: Provide fire/smoke dampers, of types and sizes indicated. Construct

casings of 11-ga galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish. Provide fusible link rated at 160 to 165 degrees F (71 to 74 degrees C) unless otherwise indicated. Provide additional frangible link containing explosive charge, connected in series with fusible link. Provide stainless steel spring loaded leakage seals in sides of casing, and 36" long wire leads for connecting smoke link to smoke detector, and the following additional features:

1. Damper Blade Assembly: Single-blade type. 2. Damper Blade Assembly: Multi-blade type. 3. Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain type.

4. Blade Material: Steel, matching casing. 5. Blade Material: Stainless steel.

D. Motor-Driven Fire/Smoke Dampers: Provide motor-driven fire/smoke dampers in types and sizes

indicated, with casing constructed of 11-ga galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish, fusible link 160 to 165 degrees F (71 to 74 degrees C), unless otherwise indicated, and curtain type stainless steel interlocking blades, with electric motor equipped with instant closure clutch, stainless steel cable damper blade linkage, motor mounting bracket, and 32" long wire leads for connecting to smoke detector, and with the following construction features:

1. Unit Assembly: Motor mounted outside air stream. 2. Unit Assembly: Motor mounted inside air stream.

E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering fire

and smoke dampers which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc. 3. Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries Inc. 4. Louvers and Dampers, Inc. 5. Penn Ventilator Co. 6. Phillips-Aire 7. Ruskin Mfg. Co.

2.3 TURNING VANES:


SECTION 15910



A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated turning vanes and vane runners, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1-1/2" wide curved blades set

at 3/4" o.c., supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2" o.c., and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Provide acoustic turning vanes constructed of airfoil shaped aluminum

extrusion with perforated faces and fiberglass fill.

D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering turning vanes which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Aero Dyne Co. 2. Airsan Corp. 3. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America. 4. Barber-Colman Co. 5. Duro Dyne Corp. 6. Environmental Elements Corp.; Subs, Koppers Co., Inc. 7. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co. 8. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc. 9. Souther, Inc.

2.4 DUCT HARDWARE:

A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following:

1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct

test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests. 2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft; and

end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering duct

hardware which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ventfabrics, Inc. 2. Young Regulator Co.

2.5 DUCT ACCESS DOORS:

A. General: Provide where indicated, duct access doors of size indicated.

B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gage as ductwork served, provide insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. Provide one size hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for larger doors.

C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering duct

access doors which may be incorporated in the work include, limited to the following:


SECTION 15910



1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 3. Ventifabrics, Inc. 4. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Air Systems Div.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS:

A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibration of connected equipment.

B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering flexible

connections which may be incorporated in the work include, limited to the following:

1. American/Elgen Co.; Energy Div. 2. Flexaust (The) Co. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES:

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply and exhaust air systems,

and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is to small for person to enter.

D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork

accessories properly with other work. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and


SECTION 15910



adjust for proper action.

1. Label access doors in accordance with Division-15 section "Mechanical Identification". 2. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division- 15 section "Testing, Adjusting,

and Balancing".

B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.

3.5 EXTRA STOCK:

A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature range; obtain receipt.


DIVISION 15 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

SECTION 15932



PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following:

1. Ceiling air diffusers. 2. Wall registers and grilles. 3. Louvers.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard

for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70

"Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under

requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual". 4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal.

5. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters".

6. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 7. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for

the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems". 1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following:

1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number

furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating

construction, finish, and mounting details. 3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability,

temperature and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air outlet

and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:


SECTION 15932



A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.

B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work

traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS: (See schedule for additional requirements)

A. Materials: Aluminum Construction, diffusers shall be constructed entirely on extruded aluminum. B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity

traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.

C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent ceiling

systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser.

D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on

diffuser schedule. The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on schedule.

1. Diffuser Faces:

a. Round : Round housing, core of concentric rings, round duct connection. b. Half-Round: Semi-circular housing, core of concentric half-rings, rectangular duct

connection. c. Square : Square housing, core of square concentric louvers, square or round duct

connection. d. Rectangular: Rectangular housing, core of rectangular concentric louvers, square or

round duct connection. e. Panel: Square or rectangular housing extended to form a panel to fit in ceiling

system module, core of square or rectangular concentric louvers, square or round duct connection.

f. Perforated: Round, square, or rectangular housing covered with removable perforated panel in frame. Conceal air pattern devices above panel.

g. Linear: Extruded aluminum continuous slot, single or multiple. 2. Diffuser Mountings: AS REQUIRED

a. Stepped-Down : Diffuser housing below ceiling with perimeter flange and gasket to

seal against ceiling construction. b. Flush: Diffuser housing above ceiling surface with flush perimeter flange and gasket

to seal against ceiling. c. Lay-In : Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars

and rest on top surface of tee bar. d. Snap-In: Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling concealed suspension runners,

and snap into runners.


SECTION 15932



3. Diffuser Patterns: AS REQUIRED

a. Fixed: Fixed position core with concentric rings or louvers for radial air flow around

entire perimeter of diffuser. b. 2 Position: Manual 2-position core with concentric rings or louvers, upper position for

horizontal air flow, lower position for vertical air flow. c. Adjustable: Manual adjustable core with concentric rings or louvers, fully adjustable

for horizontal to vertical air flow. d. Supply and Return: 2-section core, center position for return, perimeter for supply. e. 1 Way: Fixed louver face for 1-direction air flow, direction indicated on drawings. f. 2 Way: Fixed louver face for 2-direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings. g. 3 Way: Fixed louver face for 3-direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings. h. 4 Way: Fixed louver face for 4-direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings. i. Induction: Internal aspirator designed to mix air drawn into center core with

conditioned air. j. Rearrangeable Core: Modular directional core which can be rearranged for selected

air pattern. 4. Diffuser Dampers:

a. Opposed Blade: Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, key operated from

face of diffuser. b. Butterfly: Two semicircular flaps connected to linkage adjustable from face of

diffuser with key, and with straightening grid. c. Supply and Return: For supply and return diffusers, butterfly type damper in return

neck, annular adjustable dampers in supply duct. d. Integral: Combination volume control and pattern adjustment for linear diffusers. e. Fire Damper: Combination adjustable opposed blade damper and fusable link fire

damper with UL approved link and assembly designed to meet requirements of NFPA 90A.

5. Diffuser Accessories:

a. Equalizing Deflectors: Adjustable parallel blades in frame for straightening air flow. b. Smudge Ring: Extension perimeter frame around diffuser, sized so induced air

impinges on frame and not on ceiling. c. Plaster Ring: Perimeter ring designed to act as a plaster stop and diffuser anchor. d. Extractor: Curved blades mounted on adjustable frame to produce air scooping

action in duct at diffuser take-off. e. Blank-Off Baffles: Arc segments designed to fit into diffuser housing to divert air flow

from impinging on obstruction. f. Operating Keys: Tools designed to fit through diffuser face and operate volume

control device and/or pattern adjustment.

6. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work limited to the following: 1. Metal-Aire 2. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc. 3. Tuttle & Bailey; Div. of Interpace Corp.

2.2 WALL REGISTERS AND GRILLES:


SECTION 15932



A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard wall registers and grilles

where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide wall registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity

traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in manufacturer's current data.

C. Wall Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with

adjacent wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall construction which will contain each type of wall register and grille.

D. Types: Provide wall registers and grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes.

1. Register and Grille Materials:

a. Aluminum Construction: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum frame and

adjustable blades.

2. Register and Grille Faces: AS REQUIRED

a. Horizontal Straight Blades: Horizontal blades, individually adjustable, at manufacturer's standard spacing.

b. Vertically Straight Blades : Vertical blades, individually adjustable, at manufacturer's standard spacing.

c. Horizontal 45 Degree Fixed Blades: Horizontal blades, fixed at 45 degrees, at manufacturer's standard spacing.

3. Register and Grille Patterns:

a. Single Deflection: 1-set of blades in face. b. Double Deflection: 2-sets of blades in face, rear set at 90 degrees to face set.

4. Register and Grille Dampers:

a. Opposed Blade: Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, key operated from

face of register. b. Opposed Blade Fusible Link: Opposed blade damper with spring closing and

UL-listed fusible link for 160 degrees F (71 degrees C).

5. Register and Grille Accessories:

a. Extractor: Curved blades mounted on adjustable frame to produce air scooping action in duct at register or grille take-off.

b. Plaster Frame: Perimeter frame designed to act as plaster stop and register or grille anchor.

c. Operating Keys: Tools designed to fit through register or grille face and operate volume control device and/or pattern adjustable.

6. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated in the Work limited to the following:


SECTION 15932



1. Metal-Aire 2. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc. 3. Tuttle & Bailey; Div. of Interpace Corp.

2.3 LOUVERS:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide louvers that have minimum free area, and maximum pressure drop of each

type as listed in manufacturer's current data, complying with louver schedule.

C. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of louver.

D. Materials: Construct of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T52. Weld units or use

stainless steel fasteners.

E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames.

F. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering louvers

which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Metal-Aire 2. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc. 3. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 4. Architectural Louvers

2.4 LINEAR DIFFUSERS

A. Type: Supply Registers shall be adjustable double-deflection type extruded aluminum. B. Bars: Provide vertical adjustable face bars and horizontal adjustable rear bars spaces ¾ inch on

centers. C. Fins: In lieu of rear bars, fixed horizontal fins, removable as a unit from the register face, and

providing three position up-down adjustment may be furnished. D. Frames: Provide extruded frames fitted with felt, neoprene or plastic gaskets.

E. Dampers: Provide register dampers of formed steel, cadmium plated, gang key operated,

opposed blade type and arranged so that the operating mechanism shall not project through any part of the register face.

F. Mounting hardware: Provide round or countersunk head Phillips screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


SECTION 15932



3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended function.

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface

installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.

C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling module.

3.3 SPARE PARTS:

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require them.


DIVISION 15 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

SECTION 15990




A. Scope: Extent of testing, adjusting and balancing work required by this Section.

B. Systems: Testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this Section includes the following systems.

1. Air handling systems including supply return, exhaust and outside. 2. Hydronic system including heating, chilled water, . 3. Verify temperature control system operations


A. Tester's Qualifications: A specialist certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) with at least 3 years of experience in those testing, adjusting and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project, who is not the installer of the system to be tested and is otherwise independent of the project.

B. Codes and Standards: Provide testing, adjusting and balancing conforming to American Society

of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), and either NEBB or AABC the following:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Comply with the following:

a. S1.4 Specification For Sound Level Meters b. S1.11 Specification for Octave-Band and Frcational-Octave-Band Analog and

Digital Filters 2. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE):

Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to measurements, instruments, and testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3. NEBB or AABC: Comply with NEBB'S "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting,

Balancing of Environmental Systems" or comply with AABC MN-1 "National Standards," as applicable to mechanical air and hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus.

C. Penalty: The Contractor shall submit the name of the organization he proposes to employ for

approval within 45 days after contract award. If the Contractor fails to submit the name of an acceptable agency within the specified time, a firm may be selected to accomplish the work, and this selection shall be binding upon the Contractor at no additional cost.

D. Calibration of Testing Instruments: All measurement instruments used for testing, adjusting,

balancing, and commissioning shall be calibrated. The time between the most recent calibration data and the final test report date shall not be over 3 years.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports, signed by the test and balance supervisor who performed the work. In addition, have the reports certified by a Professional Engineer who is familiar with testing and balancing and the project, and is registered in the jurisdiction where testing is being conducted. The final reports shall include identification and types of instruments used, and their most recent calibration date and calibration date.

B. Standards: The Contractor shall deliver a copy of either NEBB or AABC standards for testing and


SECTION 15990



balancing work associated with the project. This document shall serve as specific guidance to construction engineers as to minimum requirements.

C. Maintenance Data: Include, in maintenance manuals, copies of certified test reports and identification of instruments.

D. Qualifications: The Contractor shall submit the certified individual qualifications of all persons

responsible for supervising and performing the actual work, the name of the certifying engineer, and the qualifications of the independent Registered Professional Engineer certifying the report.

1.4 AGENDA

A. Agenda: A preliminary report and agenda shall be submitted and approved prior to the start of testing and balancing work.

1. Review plans and specifications prior to installation of any of the affected systems, and

submit a report indicating any deficiencies in the systems that would preclude the proper adjusting, balancing, and testing of the systems.

2. The agenda shall include a general description of each air and water system with its associated equipment and operation cycles for heating, intermediate, and cooling.

3. The agenda shall include a list of all air and water flow and air terminal measurements to be performed.

4. The agenda shall incorporate the proposed selection points for sound measurements, including typical spaces as well as sound sensitive areas like conference rooms.

5. The agenda shall also include specific test procedures and parameters for determining specified quantities (e.g. flow, drafts, sound levels) from the actual field measurements to establish compliance with contract requirements. Samples of forms showing application of procedures and calculations to typical systems shall be submitted.

6. Specific test procedures for measuring air quantities at terminals shall specify type of instrument to be used, method of instrument application (by sketch) and factors for: a. Air terminal configuration. b. Flow direction (supply or exhaust). c. Velocity corrections. d. Effective area applicable to each size and type of air terminal. e. Density corrections.

7. The agenda shall include identification and types of measurement instruments to be used, and their most recent calibration date and calibration date.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. General: Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until the following conditions have been met.

1. Work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work yet

to be completed on the tested equipment. 2. Work scheduled for testing, adjusting and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt and

discarded building materials. 3. All architectural openings (doors, windows, and other openings) which may affect the

operation of the system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced shall at their normal states. 4. All related mechanical systems which may affect the operation of the system to be tested,

adjusted, and balanced shall be at their normal operating conditions.


SECTION 15990



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS (Not Used) 2.2 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. Material: Seal, patch and repair ductwork, piping and equipment drilled or cut for testing purposes.

1. Plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings. 2. Piping shall be capped with materials the same as the piping system. 3. Insulation shall be neatly hemmed with metal or plastic edging, leaving test points visible for

future testing. 2.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS

A. Standards: Utilize instruments and equipment of type, precision, and capacity as recommended in the following standards:

1. NEBB "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental

Systems." 2. AABC Manual MN-1.

B. Test Instruments: All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibration

histories for each instrument shall be available for examination. Each test instrument shall be calibrated by an approved laboratory or by the manufacturer. A representative has the right to request instrument recalibration, or the use of other instruments and test methodology, where accuracy of readings is questionable.

C. Additional Instruments: Permanently installed measuring instruments , such as temperature and

pressure gauges, shall be checked against transfer standard instruments. Any instrument which does not meet specification requirement shall be replaced or recalibrated.

D. Cone Instruments: The Contractor shall employ manufactured enclosure type cones, capable of

air volume direct readings, for all diffuser air flow measurements. The readout meters shall meet calibration requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROCEDURES AND INSTRUMENTS, GENERAL

A. Requirements: All systems and components thereof shall be adjusted to perform as required.

B. Test Duration: Operating tests of heating and cooling coils, fans, and other equipment shall be of not less than four hours duration after stabilized operating conditions have been established. Capacities shall be based on temperatures and air and water quantities measured during such tests.

C. Instrumentation: Method of application of instrumentation shall be in accordance with the

approved agenda.


SECTION 15990



1. All instruments shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's certified instructions. 2. All labor, instruments, and appliances required shall be furnished by the Design Builder.

Permanently installed instruments used for the tests (e.g., flow meters and Btu meters) shall not be installed until the entire system has been cleaned and ready for operation.

3. See Section 15130, "Meters and Gauges" for thermometer accuracy requirements. 3.2 AIR SYSTEMS PROCEDURES

A. Adjustments: Adjust all air handling systems to provide approximate design air quantity to or through, each component, and to maintain stable and comfortable interior temperatures, free of drafts or stagnant conditions. Adjusting and balancing of all systems shall be conducted during periods of the year approximating maximum seasonal operation.

B. Equalizers: Equalizing devices shall be adjusted to provide uniform velocity across the inlets (duct

side for supply) of terminals prior to measuring flow rates.

C. Balance: Flow adjusting (volume control) devices shall be used to balance air quantities (i.e., proportion flow between various terminals comprising system) to the extent that their adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound (i.e., in excess of specified limits).

1. Balancing between runs (submains, branch mains, and branches) generally shall be

accomplished by flow regulating devices at, or in, the divided-flow fitting. 2. Restriction imposed by flow regulating devices in or at terminals shall be minimal. Final

measurements of air quality shall be made after the air terminal has been adjusted to provide the optimum air patterns of diffusion.

D. Fan Adjustment: Total air system quantities, generally, shall be varied by adjustment of fan

speeds or axial-flow fan wheel blade pitch. Damper restriction of a system's total flow may be used only for systems with direct-connected fans (without adjustable pitch blades), provided system pressure is less than 1/2-inch W.G. and sound level criteria is met.

E. Air Measurement: Where air quantity measuring devices are specified in other sections such

systems shall be used as a cross-check of portable measuring equipment.

1. Except as specifically indicated herein, pitot tube traverses shall be made of each duct to measure air flow therein. Pitot tubes, associated instruments, traverses, and techniques shall conform to the ASHRAE "Handbook Fundamentals Inch Pound Edition."

2. For ducts serving modular office areas with movable partitions, which are subject to change, pitot tube traverses may be omitted provided the duct serves only a single room or space and its design volume is less than 2000 cfm. In lieu of pitot tube traverses, air flow in the duct shall be determined by totalling volume of individual terminals served, measured as described herein.

3. Where duct's design velocity and air quantity are both less than 1000 (fpm/cfm), air quantity may be determined by measurements at terminals served.

F. Test Holes: Test holes shall be in a straight duct, as far as possible downstream from elbows,

bends, take-offs, and other turbulence generating devices, to optimize reliability of flow measurements.

G. Air Terminal Balancing: Generally, measurement of flow rates by means of velocity meters

applied to individual terminals, with or without cones or other adapters, shall be used only for balancing. Measurement of air quantities at each type of air terminal (inlet and outlet) shall be determined by the method approved for the balancing agenda. Laboratory tests shall be conducted to prove of methodology when so directed. Such tests shall be conducted in


SECTION 15990



conformance with applicable ASHRAE or American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) codes and shall be made at no cost.

H. Air Motion: Air motion and distribution shall be as required. The Design Builder at no additional

cost shall, in addition to air motion measurements, make smoke tests wherever requested to demonstrate the air distribution from air terminals.

I. Volume Dampers: Adjust volume dampers at each diffuser as required to obtain CFM as indicated

on drawings. 3.3 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURES

A. Adjustment: All heating and cooling water systems shall be adjusted to provide required quantity to or through each component.

B. Metering: Water quantities and pressures shall be measured with calibrated meters.

1. Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metering fittings and pressure gauges shall be used to

measure water flow rates and balance systems. Systems shall be adjusted to provide the approved pressure drops through the heat transfer equipment (coils, converters, etc.) prior to the capacity testing.

2. Where flow metering fittings are not installed, in air/water type heat transfer equipment, flow balance shall be determined by measuring the air side energy differential across the heat transfer equipment. Measurement of water temperature differential shall be performed with the air system, adjusted as described herein, in operation.

C. Automatic Controls: Automatic control valves shall be positioned for full flow through the heat

transfer equipment of the system during tests.

D. Flow: Flow through bypass circuits at three-way valves shall be adjusted to equal that through the supply circuit, when the valve is in the bypass position.

E. Distribution: Adjustment of distribution shall be effected by means of balancing devices (cocks,

valves, and fittings) and automatic flow control valves as provided; service valves shall not be used.

1. Where automatic flow control valves are utilized in lieu of Venturi tubes, only pressure

differential need be recorded, provided that the pressure is at least the minimum applicable to the tag rating.

F. Heat and Cooling Coils: Balance to manufacturer requirements and proposed system parameters.

3.4 COIL CAPACITY VERIFICATION

A. Air coil capacities shall be verified from air side measurement data. Capacities of coils shall be the difference of the energy carried by the air between the up stream and down stream of the coils.

B. The measured air flow rate for the fan may be used for air coil capacity calculations providing no

ducted bypassing of coil is occurring.

C. Capacity verifications shall be performed after air and water systems have been balanced.

D. False load shall be applied if the upstream air or water does not meet the specified conditions at the time of test.


SECTION 15990



3.5 SOUND TEST PROCEDURES

A. Scope: Tests of sound levels shall be made at each selection point included in the agenda. B. Timing: Sound level measurements shall be taken at times when the building is unoccupied, or

when activity in surrounding areas and background noise level in areas tested are at a minimum and relatively free from sudden changes in noise levels.

1. Measurements shall be taken with all equipment turned off, except that being tested. 2. The required sound levels shall be measured at any point within a room not less than 6 feet

from an air terminal or room unit, and not closer than 3 feet from any floor, wall, or ceiling surface.

C. Meters: Sound levels shall be measured with a sound meter complying with ANSI S1.4. The "A"

scale shall be used to measure over all sound levels. To determine the specified octave band levels, the above sound level meter, set on "C" scale, shall be supplemented by an octave band analyzer complying with ANSI S1.11.

D. Equipment Components: The "Equipment Component" of room sound equals LPt-C. The

"Equipment Component" of room sound (noise) levels shall be determined for each of eight octave bands as follows.

1. Measure room sound pressure level "LPb" with equipment to be tested shut off. 2. Measure room sound pressure level "LPt" with equipment to be tested turned on. 3. Calculate LPt-LPb; if this value is less than 1, applicable test must be rerun with lower

background level (LPb) unless LPt is within sound pressure level specified for equipment. 4. Determine "c" from the table below:

LPt-LPb (db) c (db)

1 7 2 4 3 3 4 to 4-1/2 2 5 to 5-1/2 1-1/2 6 to 7-1/2 1 8 to 12 1/2 over 12 0

3.6 CERTIFIED REPORTS

A. Submittals: Three copies of the reports described herein, covering air and water system performance, air motion (fpm), and sound pressure levels, shall be submitted prior to final tests and inspection.

B. Instrument Records: Types, serial numbers, and dates of calibration of all instruments shall be

included.

C. Reports: Reports shall conspicuously identify items not conforming to contract requirements, or obvious maloperation and design deficiencies.

D. Certification: The reports shall be certified by an independent Registered Professional Engineer who

is versed in the field of air and water balancing and who is not affiliated with any firm involved in the


SECTION 15990



design or construction phases of the project. Certification shall include checking of adherence to agenda, of calculations, of procedures, and evaluation of final summaries.

3.7 AIR SYSTEM DATA

A. Report: The certified report shall include for each air handling system the data listed below.

1. Equipment (Fan or Factory Fabricated Station Unit): a. Installation data

(a) Manufacturer and model (b) Size (c) Arrangement, discharge and class (d) Motor hp, voltage, phase, cycles, and full load amps (e) Location and local identification data

b. Design data (a) Data.

c. Fan recorded (test) data (a) cfm (b) Static pressure (c) rpm (d) Motor operating amps motor operating bhp

2. Duct Systems:

a. Duct air quantities (maximum and minimum) - main, submains, branches, outdoor (outside) air, total air, and exhaust (a) Duct size(s) (b) Number of Pitot tube (pressure measurements) (c) Sum of velocity measurements (Note: Do not add pressure measurements) (d) Average velocity (e) Recorded (test) cfm design cfm

b. Individual air terminals (a) Terminal identification supply or exhaust, location and number designation (b) Type size, manufacturer and catalog identification applicable factor for application,

velocity, area, etc., and designated area (c) Design and recorded velocities- fpm (state "core," "inlet," etc., as applicable) (d) Design and recorded quantities -cfm deflector vane or diffusion cone settings

3.8 WATER SYSTEM DATA

A. Report: The certified report for reach water system shall include the data listed below.

1. Air Heating and Cooling Equipment: a. Design data

(a) Load in Btu or MBh (b) gpm (c) Entering and leaving water temperature (d) Entering and leaving air conditions (DB and WB) (e) cfm (f) Water pressure drop

b. Recorded data

(a) Type of equipment and identification (location or number designation) (b) Entering and leaving air conditions (DB and WB) (c) Entering and leaving water temperatures


SECTION 15990



(d) gpm (if metered) Temperature rise or drop 3.9 SOUND DATA

A. Report: The certified report shall record data on sound levels, taken at each selected location, as follows.

1. Source of sound and location 2. Diagram or description of relationship of sound source to measuring instrument 3. "A" scale readings equipment being tested turned off (ambient) equipment being tested turned

on (operating conditions) 4. Readings at each specified octave band frequency equipment being tested turned off (ambient)

equipment being tested turned on (operating conditions) 5. "Equipment Components" of sound (noise) levels with applicable calculations per "Sound Test

Procedures" 6. Graph showing relationship between pressure levels specified and recorded readings

B. Retest: Subsequent to any correctional construction work, such as acoustic corrections,

measurement shall be made to verify that associated air and water quantities, as previously measured, have not been disrupted.

1. Certified report shall record all sound data, and their locations, after final adjustments of air and

water systems involves. 3.10 FINAL COMMISSIONING TESTS, INSPECTIONS AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Scope: Test shall be made to demonstrate that capacities and performance of air and water systems comply with contract requirements.

1. At the time of final inspection, the Design Builder shall recheck, random selection of data (water

and air quantities, air motion, and sound levels) recorded in the certified report. 2. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the commissioning team.

3. Measurement and test procedures shall be the same as approved for work forming basis of certified report.

4. Selections for recheck (specific plus random), in general, will not exceed 25 percent of the total number tabulated in the report, except that special air systems may require a complete recheck for safety reasons.

B. Retests: If random tests elicit a measured flow deviation of 10 percent or more from, or a sound

level of 2 db or more greater than, that recorded in the certified report listings, as 10 percent or more of the rechecked selections, the report shall be automatically rejected. In the event the report is rejected, all systems shall be readjusted and tested, new data recorded, new certified reports submitted, and new inspection tests made, all at no additional cost. Retainage time shall be based on the date of the final acceptance of the certified report.

C. Marking of Settings: Following final acceptance of certified reports, the settings of all valves,

splitters, dampers, and other adjustment devices shall be permanently marked by the Design Builder so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Devices shall not be marked until after final acceptance.


DIVISION 16 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 16010




A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 16.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative, procedural, and other requirements for electrical installations. The following requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Divisions 1 through 16:

1. Submittals. 2. Quality control. 3. Definitions and abbreviations. 4. Scheduling. 5. Coordination drawings. 6. Record documents. 7. Maintenance manuals. 8. Delivery, storage, and handling. 9. Products. 10. Rough-ins. 11. Electrical installations. 12. Permits and instructions. 13. Field quality control. 14. Protection. 14. Additional work. 15. Electrical schedules. 16. Cutting and patching.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1.

B. Increase, by the quantity listed below, the number of electrical related shop drawings, product data, and samples submitted, to allow for required distribution plus two copies of each submittal required, which will be retained by the Electrical Consulting Engineer.

1. Shop Drawings - Initial Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black-line prints. 2. Shop Drawings - Final Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black-line prints. 3. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item. 4. Samples: 1 addition as set.

C. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications.

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Functional and Operational Test Procedure:

1. Test procedure to completely test all systems as to their functional and sequential operation.

2. Submit two (2) draft copies for review before conducting test.


SECTION 16010



3. Certify that the test procedure was used and testing completed, and that all systems are operational and functioning properly.

4. Submit certified Test Procedure for review prior to the date of final inspection. 5. Systems to be covered by test procedure:

a. Power distribution b. Lighting systems including general lighting c. Fire Alarm systems d. Equipment shut-down requirements e. Emergency power/inverter systems f. Grounding systems

B. Other Tests and Certifications for:

1. Grounding System: As specified under Section 16452.

1.5 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

A. Electrical Definitions: As defined by NEC, Article 100.

B. The term "indicated" shall mean "as shown on contract documents (specifications, drawings, and related attachments)".

C. The term "provide" shall mean "to furnish, install and connect completely".

D. The term "size" shall mean one or more of the following: "length, current and voltage rating,

number of poles, NEMA size, and other similar electrical characteristics".

E. The term "space" on panelboard and switchboard schedules shall mean "provide space to install the number of poles and size of the protective device indicated with all the necessary buss and fittings to install the device at some future date".

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate electrical work with other divisions of this project.

B. Coordinate electrical work with Owner.

C. Written requests for approval for planned shutdowns or interruption of Owner's operation or equipment shall be made 72 hours prior to the start of the requested periods.

D. Written notification for on site training of Owner's personnel shall be made 1 week prior to the

start of the requested training period. 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with Division 1 to a scale of 1/4"=1'-0" or larger; detailing major elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

1. Indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems, equipment, and materials.


SECTION 16010



Include the following:

a. Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance.

b. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. c. Equipment connections and support details.

2. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into the

building during construction. 3. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and

ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 4. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets and

inlets, light fixtures, raceway systems components, Exhaust/Kitchen hoods, and other ceiling-mounted devices.

1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for:

1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of

control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance

curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


SECTION 16010



2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all electrical equipment has been based on Square D products.

B. As specified under other RELATED SECTIONS. Comparable manufacturers may be utilized, and include the following:

1. Siemens 2. Square D (Design Based) 3. GTE Sylvania 4. General Electric

C. As specified on Drawings.

2.2 MATERIAL

A. General:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, all raceways for service, feeders, branch and control wiring are RSC or IMC. See Section 16110.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, wiring to equipment and motors may be installed in liquid tight flexible conduit, or in interior locations in flexible metal conduit, with a maximum length of 5 feet.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, all conductors to be copper THHN/THWN. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, all outlet and switch boxes to be cast iron with threaded

hubs. 5. In interior protected locations, where recessed in ceiling and walls, outlet and switch

boxes may be stamped steel. 6. Unless otherwise indicated, provide ivory, heavy duty grade, 20 ampere, receptacles

and switches. Plates shall be 302 stainless steel, satin finish. Plates for surface mounted interior boxes may be stamped steel. Plates exposed to weather or water to be metal, weatherproof type.

B. As specified under RELATED SECTIONS.


2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. General:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, externally operated safety switches are unfused, solid neutral, heavy duty, and selected to meet the load requirements.



2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, all enclosures are NEMA Type 1. NEMA Type 3R shall be


SECTION 16010



used for wet/damp locations.


C. As specified on Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.

C. Contractor is to provide connections, both power and control as noted, for kitchen equipment.

Kitchen equipment indicated on drawings is to be supplied by others. Division 16 shall coordinate the respective installations with the supplier and agency.

3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building

components. Electrical plans and details do not show all interferences and conditions, visible and/or hidden, that may exist. Before selecting material and equipment, and proceeding with work, inspect areas where material and equipment are to be installed to insure suitability, and check needed space for placements, clearances and interconnections. Before cutting or drilling into building elements inspect and layout work to avoid damaging structural elements or building utilities.

2. Electrical plans, details, and diagrams show the general location and arrangement of electrical systems. They are diagrammatic and do not show all conduit bodies, connectors, bends, fittings, hangers, and additional pull and junction boxes which the Contractor must provide to complete the electrical system.

3. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 4. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of

construction, to allow for electrical installations. 5. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 6. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment

for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. Verify dimensional constraints of building door openings and passageways, and the maximum floor loadings, for the movement of selected material and equipment. Order equipment and material, broken down as may be required, to meet these constraints.

7. Measurement from above finished floor (AFF) shall be taken from the finished floor surface to the top of wall receptacles and switch boxes, to the centerline of wall lighting outlet boxes, to the top of wall mounted equipment enclosures, to the centerline of top most switch handle, or to the lowest surface of ceiling lighting fixtures and other ceiling mounted equipment.

a. Unless otherwise indicated, wall switch boxes shall be 42 inches AFF. b. Unless otherwise indicated, receptacle boxes shall be 18 inches AFF. Receptacle


SECTION 16010



mounted above counter and at furniture locations shall be coordinated with architectural elements. Coordinate with Architect.

c. Verify connection mounting heights with kitchen equipment. d. Surface raceway heights shall be coordinated with Architectural

requirements.

8. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible. Switch and receptacle heights shall meet handicap accessible code requirements.

9. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with incoming utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, power, telephone, and data service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service. Provide power connection to equipment. Coordinate with other Divisions.

10. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Engineer.

11. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

12. Conduit Sizing: a. Unless otherwise indicated, conduit size for indicated conductor shall be based

on Chapter 9 of NEC. b. Conduit: 3/4 inch minimum size.

13. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or

replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Measure and locate placement of equipment and materials in relation to building structure and surfaces, and between equipment to be installed and wired. Maintain required minimum access spacing for equipment and enclosures.

14. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified elsewhere.

15. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

16. Unless otherwise noted, individual raceway runs are required for each kitchen equipment component. Connection shall be routed down existing walls exposed, concealed in new walls, and/or under slab to the respective area as noted.

3.3 PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Obtain and pay for all required permits and arrange for all required inspections in accordance with state and local governing authorities.

B. Final Electrical Inspection Certificate from inspection agency or governing authority.


A. Perform field tests as specified under other electrical sections. B. Arrange for local Inspection Authorities to inspect work performed prior to burial, closing-in

behind wall and above ceiling, or encased in concrete. Also arrange for final inspection of work and obtain Final Inspection Certificate before final inspection of work by Owner or his representative.


SECTION 16010



3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect personnel from coming in contact with live parts. B. During remodeling or alteration work, maintain fire ratings of walls, floors and ceilings when

work is left unattended.

C. Protect from damage and theft equipment and materials provided or supplied by others in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and warranties, and with electrical standards and practices.

3.6 ADDITIONAL WORK

A. Provide temporary electric service power outlets and lighting during construction. B. Provide fire alarm system and interconnections to existing building fire alarm system.

C. Demolish existing electrical systems as required and in accordance with specifications.

D. Provide connections for power and controls to mechanical equipment being supplied under

other divisions.

E. Provide power and control wiring to exhaust equipment and fire suppression systems.

F. Provide power connections to miscellaneous equipment, ancillary systems, etc. Including but not limited to camera surveillance, security, door entry systems and related devices.

G. Provide emergency and egress lighting units.

3.7 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES

A. As specified in related sections or shown on drawings. 3.8 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements apply:

1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required to:

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. b. Remove and replace defective Work. c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents. d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. f. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide

for Engineer observation of concealed Work.

2. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of electrical items indicated to


SECTION 16010



be removed and items made obsolete by the new Work. 3. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or

scheduled to be removed. 4. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the

spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 5. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent

installations. 6. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials matching

existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

7. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.


DIVISION 16 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 16050




A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Requirements specified in other Division 16 Sections apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with electrical installations as follows:

1. Selective demolition including:

a. Nondestructive removal of materials and equipment for reuse or salvage as

indicated. b. Dismantling electrical materials and equipment made obsolete by these installations.

2. Miscellaneous metals for support of electrical materials and equipment. 3. Fire rated wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of

electrical materials and equipment. 4. Joint sealers for sealing around electrical materials and equipment; and for sealing

penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors, and foundation walls. 5. Access panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to electrical materials and

equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for the following products:

1. Access panels and doors. 2. Joint sealers.

C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood supports and

anchorage for electrical materials and equipment. D. Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations in accordance with Division 16 Section

"Basic Electrical Requirements."

E. Samples of joint sealer, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available for each product.

F. Welder certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders comply with requirements

specified under "Quality Assurance" article of this Section.

G. Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of electrical service, and details for dust and noise control.


SECTION 16050



1. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified in Division 1.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application of joint sealers, access panels, and doors.

B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide access door

assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building Materials Directory" for rating shown.

1. Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door.


A. Deliver joint sealer materials in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with the manufacturers' recommendations to

prevent their deterioration and damage. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conditions Affecting Selective Demolition: The following project conditions apply:

1. Protect adjacent materials indicated to remain or in the other phases of the proposed construction. Install and maintain dust and noise barriers to keep dirt, dust, and noise from being transmitted to adjacent areas. Remove protection and barriers after demolition operations are complete.

2. Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through demolition area and serving other areas outside the demolition limits. Maintain services to areas outside demolition limits. When services must be interrupted, install temporary services for affected areas.

3. Arrange for electric service change-overs during periods when the building is not occupied. This may include week-ends and evening hours. Coordinate with Owner's representatives.

B. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within

the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do no apply joint sealers to wet substrates. 1.7 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the shut-off and disconnection of electrical power with the Owner.

B. Notify the Engineer at least 5 days prior to commencing demolition operations.


SECTION 16050



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MISCELLANEOUS METALS

A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36.

B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications.

F. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent.

B. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue; thickness as

indicated, or if not indicated, not less that 3/4 inches. 2.3 JOINT SEALER

A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application.

B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types:

1. One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,

Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

2. One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.

3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant:

1) "Chem-Calk N-Cure 2000," Bostic Construction Products Div. 2) "Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp. 3) "Silglaze N SCS 2501," General Electric Co. 4) "Silpruf SCS 2000," General Electric Co.


SECTION 16050



5) "864," Pecora Corp. 6) "Rhodorsil 5C," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 7) "Spectrum 1," Tremco, Inc. 8) "Spectrum 2," Tremco, Inc. 9) "Dow Corning 795," Dow Corning Corp. 10) "Rhodorsil 6B," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 11) "Rhodorsil 70," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 12) "Omniseal," Sonneborn Building Products Div. 13) "Chem-Calk 100," Bostik Construction Products Div. 14) "Gesil N SCS 2600," General Electric Co.

b. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant:

1) "Dow Corning 786," Dow Corning Corp. 2) "SCS 1702 Sanitary," General Electric Co. 3) "863 #345 White," Pecora Corp. 4) "Rhodorsil 6B White," Rhone-Poulenc, Inc. 5) "Proglaze White," Tremco Corp. 6) "OmniPlus," Sonneborn Building Products Div.

D. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable complying with ASTM C

834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent.



a. "Chem-Calk 600," Bostik Construction Products Div. b. "AC-20," Pecora Corp. c. Sonolac," Sonneborn Building Products Div.

E. Fire-Resistant Joint Sealers: Two-part, foamed-in-place, silicone sealant formulated for use in

through-penetration fire-stopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire- rated walls and floors. Sealants and accessories shall have fire- resistance ratings indicated, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.



a. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam," Dow Corning Corp. b. "Pensil 851," General Electric Co.

2.4 ACCESS DOORS

A. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

B. Frames: 16-gage steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling.

1. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 inch-wide-exposed


SECTION 16050



perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors. 2. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead. 3. For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead,

welded to perimeter of frame.

C. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint.

1. Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing

mechanism.

D. Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks.

E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Bar-Co., Inc. 2. J.L. Industries. 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc. 5. Nystrom, Inc.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and application of joint sealers and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALER

A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.

B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect

adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect abandoned electrical materials and equipment indicated to be removed and not indicated to be salvaged or saved.

B. Materials and Equipment To Be Salvaged: Remove, demount, and disconnect existing electrical

materials and equipment indicated to be removed and salvaged, and deliver materials and equipment to the location designated for storage.

C. Disposal and Cleanup: Remove from the site and legally dispose of demolished materials and

equipment not indicated to be salvaged.


SECTION 16050



D. Electrical Materials and Equipment: Demolish, remove, demount, and disconnect the following items:

1. Inactive and obsolete raceway systems, panelboards, transformers, controls, wiring devices

and fixtures.

a. Raceways embedded in floors, walls, and ceilings may remain if such materials do not interfere with new installations. Remove materials above accessible ceilings.

2. Perform cutting and patching required for demolition in accordance with Division 1.

3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."

3.5 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view

or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

D. Do not install wood materials in areas being utilized as air plenum or other spaces where a

potential combustible hazard exists. 3.6 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants. 2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic- emulsion joint sealants.

B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool

sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

C. Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other

accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS


SECTION 16050



A. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and

level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

B. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.



SECTION 16050




DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

SECTION 16060



PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Demolish designated and required elements of existing electrical system.

B. Removal materials from site.

C. Rework of existing electrical system for interface to new systems and equipment.

D. This scope of work noted is in addition to the requirements of Division 2. 1.3 EXISTING CONDITIONS:

A. Conduct electrical demolition to avoid existing system damage scheduled to remain. Interface with adjoining building elements.

B. The scope of electrical demolition shall include but not limited to the following:

-Power System -Emergency and Egress Lighting -Fire alarm system

C. Conduct operations with minimum interference to existing systems serving other parts of the

building. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION:

A. Protect existing systems and components which are not to be demolished. B. Protect existing items which are not indicated to the altered. C. Provide and locate dumpster where directed by Owner.

D. Coordinate work with Divisions 2, 15 and 16.

E. Construct enclosed chutes from work areas to dumpsters. Use chutes to convey all debris.

3.2 EXECUTION

A. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner.

B. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site.

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

SECTION 16060



C. Cease operations and notify Engineer immediately if adjacent systems appear to be endangered. Do not resume operations until corrective measures have been taken.

D. Do not burn or bury materials on site.

E. Keep work sprinkled to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water main connections for this purpose.

F. Backfill areas excavated, open pits, and holes caused as result of demolition.

G. Remove designated electrical systems and equipment as noted above and in accordance with the

Contract Documents, and Electrical Drawings.

H. Where penetrations through walls are to be closed and patched, both sides of wall shall be closed and patched

I. Removed demolished materials from site as work progresses. Leave site in clean condition.

J. Remove dumpster and clean and repair site to original condition.


DIVISION 16 RACEWAYS

SECTION 16110





B. Requirements specified in other Division 16 Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways for electrical wiring. Types of raceways in this section include the following:

1. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Intermediate metal conduit. 3. Liquidtight flexible conduit. 4. Rigid metal conduit. 5. Electrical Metallic Tubing. 6 Wireways and surface raceway.

B. Related Sections: The following Division 16 Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. "Wires and Cables" for other wiring methods. 2. "Supporting Devices" for raceway supports. 3. "Cabinets, Boxes, and Fittings" for boxes used with conduit and tubing systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data for the following products:

1. Raceway system.

C. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's written installation instructions for wireway, and raceway products.


A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to

raceways.

C. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and components listed and labeled by UL, ETL, or CSA.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate with other Work, including metal and concrete deck installation, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other Work.


SECTION 16110




A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Conduit Bodies:

1. Adalet-PLM 2. Appleton Electric Co. 3 Carlon 4. Crouse-Hinds Division, Cooper Industries, Inc. 5. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. 6. O-Z/Gedney 7. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Intermediate Steel Conduit: UL 1242.

C. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1, zinc-coated steel.

D. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSIC80.3

E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: UL 360. Fittings shall be specifically approved for

use with this raceway. 2.3 CONDUIT BODIES

A. General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws.

B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use metallic conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs for

threaded raceways.

C. Conduit Bodies 1 Inch and Smaller: Use bodies with compression- type threaded connectors. 2.4 WIREWAYS

A. General: Electrical wireways shall be of types, sizes, and number of channels indicated. Fittings and accessories including but not limited to couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapeters, hold-down straps, and end caps shall match and mate with wireway as required for completed system. Where features are not indicated, select to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable provisions of NEC.

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAY

A. General: Sizes and channels as indicated. Provide fittings that match and mate with raceway.

B. Surface Raceway: Constructed of baked enamel, painted steel with snap-on covers. Architect selected colored finish. Provide raceways of type suitable for each application required, as


SECTION 16110



indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHOD

A. Use the following wiring methods:

1. Concealed/Exposed panelboard feeders: EMT 2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

3. Concealed within finished walls/ceilings (branch circuits). 4. Above suspended ceilings (branch circuits): electrical metallic tubing, unless otherwise

noted, Property supported FMC. 5. In finished areas where walls are not to be disturbed: surface raceway (wiremold). 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install electrical raceways in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, and as follows:

B. Conceal Conduit within all finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise noted. Keep

raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and hot water pipes. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations.

C. Elevation of Raceway: Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water and sanitary

piping.

D. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within raceways.

E. Provide supports for raceways as specified elsewhere in Division 16.

F. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection.

G. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of

bends is not visible above the finished slab.

H. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.

I. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the

use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings except as otherwise indicated.

J. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance considering

the type of building construction and obstructions except as otherwise indicated. K. Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural members and

follow the surface contours as much as practical.

L. Run exposed, parallel, or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be a change in the plane of the run such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of the same size. In other cases provide


SECTION 16110



field bends for parallel raceways.

M. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight. Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Make raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

N. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool.

O. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to

enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box.

P. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end

bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use no. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament plastic

line having not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire.

R. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate

fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL- listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated:

1. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of

conditioned spaces and mechanical spaces. 2. Where required by the NEC.

S. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding

equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor.

T. Flexible Connections: Use short length (maximum of 6 ft.) of flexible conduit for recessed and

semirecessed lighting fixtures, for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. Light fixture flexible connections shall not exceed 15 ft.


A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all blockages and remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris.

B. Paint Finish: Repair damage using surface raceway manufacturer's touch-up paint.


DIVISION 16 WIRES AND CABLES

SECTION 16120





B. Requirements of other specified Division 16 Sections apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts and less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for electrical wires, cables and connectors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following code:

B. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

1. Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating materials.

C. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by UL under the following

standards.

1. UL Std. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. UL Std. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors. 3. UL Std. 1569 Metal Clad Cable.

D. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standards:

1. WC-5 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of

Electrical Energy.

E. IEEE Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standard. 1. Std. 82 Test procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors.



1. Wire and Cable:

a. American Insulated Wire Corp. b. Brintec Corp. c. Carol Cable Co. Inc. d. Senator Wire and Cable Co.


SECTION 16120



e. Southwire Company.

2. Connectors for Wires and Cable Conductors:

a. AMP b. 3M Company c. O-Z/Gedney Co. d. Square D Company.

2.2 WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where installed.

B. Conductors: Provide stranded conductors for power and lighting circuits no. 10 AWG and smaller.

Provide stranded conductors for sizes no. 8 AWG and larger.

C. Conductor Material: Copper for all wires and cables. D. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.

E. Insulation: Provide THHN/THWN insulation for all conductors size 500MCM and larger, and no. 8

AWG and smaller. For all other sizes provide, THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation as appropriate for the locations where installed.

F. Color Coding for phase identification in accordance with Table 1 in Part 3 below.

G. Jackets: Factory-applied nylon or PVC external jacketed wires and cables for pulls in raceways

over 100-feet in length, for pulls in raceways with more than three equivalent 90 deg. bends, for pulls in conduits underground or under slabs on grade, and where indicated.

H. Cables: Provide the following type(s) of cables in NEC approved locations and applications where

indicated. Provide cable UL listed for particular application:

1. Metal-Clad Cable: Type MC - limited to lighting fixtures and outlets concealed in gypsum wall partitions.

2. Metal clad above ceilings to be limited to maximum five (5) feet whips.

2.3 CONNECTORS FOR CONDUCTORS

A. Provide UL-listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHOD

A. Use the following wiring methods as indicated:

1. Wire: install all wire in raceway. 2. Metal Clad Cable, Type MC: where wiring concealed in gypsum wall partitions, ceilings, for

connections from raceway outlet boxes to lighting fixtures, unless otherwise noted.


SECTION 16120



3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Install electrical cables, wires, and connectors in compliance with NEC.

B. Coordinate cable installation with other Work.

C. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary.

D. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips which will

not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable.

E. Conceal all cable in finished spaces.

F. Keep conductor splices to minimum. G. Install splice and tap connectors which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and

insulation rating than conductors being spliced.

H. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.

I. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than no 10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal.

J. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Prior to energizing, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled.

B. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.

C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper functioning.

Correct malfunctioning units, and retest to demonstrate compliance.

D. TABLE 1: Color Coding for Phase Identification:

1. Color code secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors with factory applied color as follows:

208Y/120Volts Phase Black A Red B Blue C White Neutral Green Ground


SECTION 16120




DIVISION 16 CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS

SECTION 16135






1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes cabinets, boxes, and fittings for electrical installations and certain types of electrical fittings not covered in other sections. Types of products specified in this Section include:

1. Outlet and device boxes. 2. Pull and junction boxes. 3. Cabinets. 4. Hinged door enclosures.

B. Conduit-body-type electrical enclosures and wiring fittings are specified in Division 16 Section

"Raceways." 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cabinets: An enclosure designed either for surface or for flush mounting and having a frame, or trim in which a door or doors may be mounted.

B. Device Box: An outlet box designed to house a receptacle device or a wiring box designed to

house a switch.

C. Enclosure: A box, case, cabinet, or housing for electrical wiring or components.

D. Outlet Box: A wiring enclosure where current is taken from a wiring system to supply utilization equipment.

E. Wiring Box: An enclosure designed to provide access to wiring systems or for the mounting of

indicating devices or of switches for controlling electrical circuits. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections:

1. Product data for cabinets and enclosures with classification higher than NEMA 1. 2. Shop drawings for boxes, enclosures and cabinets that are to be shop fabricated, (nonstock

items). For shop fabricated junction and pull boxes, show accurately scaled views and spatial relationships to adjacent equipment. Show box types, dimensions, and finishes.


A. UL Listing and Labeling: Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL.

B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing and Labeling (NRTL): Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by a NRTL. The term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA


SECTION 16135



Regulation 1910.7.

C. National Electrical Code Compliance: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

D. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Standard 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment

(1000 Volts Maximum)." PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cabinets:

a. Electric Panelboard, Inc. b. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. c. Hoffman Engineering Co. d. Parker Electrical Mfg. Co. e. Spring City Electrical Mfg. Co. f. Square D Co.

2.2 CABINETS, BOXES, AND FITTINGS, GENERAL

A. Electrical Cabinets, Boxes, and Fittings: Of indicated types, sizes, and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated, provide units of types, sizes, and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. This applies to kitchen areas.

2.3 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Sheet Steel: Flat-rolled, code-gage, galvanized steel. B. Fasteners for General Use: Corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc

plated items.

C. Fasteners for Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware.

D. Cast Metal for Boxes, Enclosures, and Covers; Copper-free aluminum except as otherwise specified.

E. Exterior Finish: Gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as otherwise

indicated.

F. Painted Interior Finish: Where indicated, white baked enamel.

G. Fittings for Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: Conform to UL 514B. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel for conduit hubs, bushings and box connecters.

2.4 METAL OUTLET, DEVICE, AND SMALL WIRING BOXES

A. General: Conform to UL 514A, "Metallic Outlet Boxes, Electrical," and UL 514B, "Fittings for


SECTION 16135



Conduit and Outlet Boxes." Boxes shall be of type, shape, size, and depth to suit each location and application.

B. Steel Boxes: Conform to NEMA OS 1, "Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box

Supports." Boxes shall be sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes and accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps, cable clamps, exterior rings and fixture studs.

C. Cast-Iron Boxes: Iron alloy, waterproof, with threaded raceway entries and features and accessories suitable for each location, including mounting ears, threaded screw holes for devices and closure plugs.

2.5 PULL OR JUNCTION BOXES

A. General: Comply with UL 50, "Electrical Cabinets and Boxes", for boxes over 100 cubic inches volume. Boxes shall have screwed or bolted on covers of material same as box and shall be of size and shape to suit application.

B. Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly,

construct with internal structural steel bracing.

C. Hot-Dipped Galvanized Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with welded seams. Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural steel bracing. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Cover shall be gasketed.

D. Stainless-Steel Boxes: Fabricate of stainless steel conforming to Type 302 of ASTM A 167,

"Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip." Where necessary to provide a rigid assembly, construct with internal structural stainless steel bracing. Cover shall be gasketed.

E. Cast-Iron Boxes: Molded of cast iron alloy with gasketed cover and integral threaded conduit entrances.

2.6 CABINETS

A. Comply with UL 50, "Electrical Cabinets and Boxes."

B. Construction: Sheet steel, NEMA 4 class except as otherwise indicated. Cabinet shall consist of a box and a front consisting of a one piece frame and a hinged door. Arrange door to close against a rabbet placed all around the inside edge of the frame, with a uniformly close fit between door and frame. Provide concealed fasteners, not over 24-inches apart, to hold fronts to cabinet boxes and provide for adjustment. Provide flush or concealed door hinges not over 24-inches apart and not over 6-inches from top and bottom of door. For flush cabinets, make the front approximately 3/4 inch larger than the box all around. For surface mounted cabinets make front same height and width as box.

C. Doors: Double doors for cabinets wider than 24-inches.

D. Locks: Combination spring catch and key lock, with all locks for cabinets of the same system

keyed alike. Locks may be omitted on signal, power, and lighting cabinets located within wire closets and mechanical-electrical rooms. Locks shall be of a type to permit doors to latch closed without locking.

2.7 STEEL ENCLOSURES WITH HINGED DOORS

A. Comply with UL 50, "Cabinets and Enclosures" and NEMA ICS 6,


SECTION 16135



B. "Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems." C. Construction: Sheet steel, 16 gage, minimum, with continuous welded seams. NEMA class as

indicated; arranged for surface mounting.

D. Doors: Hinged directly to cabinet and removable, with approximately 3/4-inch flange around all edges, shaped to cover edge of box. Provide handle operated, key locking latch. Individual door width shall be no greater than 24-inches. Provide multiple doors where required.

E. Mounting Panel: Provide painted removable internal mounting panel for component installation.

F. Enclosure: NEMA 4 except as indicated. Where door gasketing is required, provide neoprene

gasket attached with oil-resistant adhesive, and held in place with steel retaining strips. For all enclosures of class higher than NEMA 1, use hubbed raceway entrances.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locations: Install items where indicated and where required to suit code requirements and installation conditions.

B. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs.

C. Support and fasten items securely in accordance with Division 16 Section "Supporting Devices."

D. Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller than sizes

indicated.

E. Remove sharp edges where they may come in contact with wiring or personnel. 3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Cabinets: Flush mounted, NEMA enclosure Type 1 except as otherwise indicated.

B. Hinged Door Enclosures: NEMA Type 1 enclosure except as indicated.

C. Hinged Door Enclosures Outdoors: Install drip hood, factory tailored to individual units.

D. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of

materials and NEMA types suitable for each location and in conformance with the following requirements:

1. Interior Dry Locations: NEMA Type 1, sheet steel or as permitted by local code. 2. Locations Exposed to Weather, Dampness, or Wet Locations: NEMA Type 3R enclosures.

E. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable for

each location except as otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES


SECTION 16135



A. Outlets at Windows and Doors: Locate close to window trim.

B. Column and Pilaster Locations: Locate outlet boxes for switches and receptacles on columns or

pilasters so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions.

C. Locations in Special Finish Materials: For outlet boxes for receptacles and switches mounted in desks or furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete block, marble, brick, stone or wood walls, use rectangular shaped boxes with square corners and straight sides. Install such boxes without plaster rings. Saw cut all recesses for outlet boxes in exposed masonry walls.

D. Gasketed Boxes: At the following locations use cast metal, threaded hub type boxes with gasketed weatherproof covers:

1. Exterior locations. 2. Where surface mounted on unfinished walls, columns or pilasters. (Cover gaskets may be

omitted in dry locations). 3. Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere. 4. Where indicated.

E. Cast-Iron Boxes: Iron alloy, waterproof, with threaded raceway entries and features and

accessories suitable for each location, including mounting ears, threaded screw holes for devices and closure plugs.

F. Mounting: Mount outlet boxes for switches with the long axis vertical or as indicated. Mount

boxes for receptacles either vertically or horizontally but consistently either way. Three or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the long axis horizontal. Locate box covers or device plates so they will not span different types of building finishes either vertically or horizontally. Locate boxes for switches near doors on the side opposite the hinges and close to door trim, even though electrical floor plans may show them on hinge side.

G. Ceiling Outlets: For fixtures, where wiring is concealed, use outlet boxes 4-inches square by

1-1/2-inches deep, minimum.

H. Cover Plates for Surface Boxes: Use plates sized to box front without overlap.

I. Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of plaster, and debris. Thoroughly clean foreign material from boxes before conductors are installed.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PULL OR JUNCTION BOXES

A. Box Selection: For boxes in main feeder conduit runs, use sizes not smaller than 8-inches square by 4-inches deep. Do not exceed 6 entering and 6 leaving raceways in a single box. Quantities of conductors (including equipment grounding conductors) in pull or junction box shall not exceed the following:

Size of Maximum Largest no. of Conductors Conductors in Box in Box No. 4/0 AWG 30 250 MCM 20 500 MCM 15


SECTION 16135



Over 500 MCM 10

1. Cable Supports: Install clamps, grids, or devices to which cables may be secured. Arrange cables so they may be readily identified. Support cable at least every 30-inches inside boxes.

2. Mount pull boxes in inaccessible ceilings with the covers flush with the finished ceiling. 3. Size: Provide pull and junction boxes for telephone, signal, and other systems at least 50

percent larger than would be required by Article 370 of NEC, or as indicated. Locate boxes strategically and provide shapes to permit easy pulling of future wires or cables of types normal for such systems.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS AND HINGED DOOR ENCLOSURES

A. Mount with fronts straight and plumb.

B. Install with tops 78-inches above floor.

C. Set cabinets in finished spaces flush with walls. 3.6 GROUNDING

A. Electrically ground metallic cabinets, boxes, and enclosures. Where wiring to item includes a grounding conductor, provide a grounding terminal in the interior of the cabinet, box or enclosure.

3.7 CLEANING AND FINISH REPAIR

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect components. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips, scratches, abrasions and weld marks.

B. Galvanized Finish: Repair damage using a zinc-rich paint recommended by the tray manufacturer.

C. Painted Finish: Repair damage using matching corrosion inhibiting touch-up coating.


DIVISION 16 WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 16143




A. This Section includes the following:

1. Receptacles 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles 3. Snap Switches 4. Wall Plates

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of product specified. B. Samples of those products indicated for sample submission in Engineer's comments on product

data submittal. Include color and finish samples of device plates and other items per Engineer's request.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes.

B. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code".

1. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable UL and NEMA standards.

1.4 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule installation of finish plates after the surface upon which they are installed has received final finish.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Bryant Electric Co. 2. Crouse-Hinds Co. 3. General Electric Co. 4. Hubbell Inc. 5. Leviton 6. Pass and Seymour Inc.

2.2 WIRING DEVICES:


SECTION 16143



A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA standards. Provide ivory color devices and wall plates. Verify color selections with Owner/Owner’s Representative.

B. Receptacles: As scheduled in Table 1 in Part 3 below. Comply with UL 498 and NEMA WD 1.

C. Ground-Fault Interrupter (GFI) Receptacles: as indicated in Table 1 in Part 3 below; provide

"feed-thru" type ground-fault circuit interrupter, with integral heavy-duty NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacles arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Provide unit designed for installation in a 2-3/4 inch deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type, Class A, Group 1, per UL Standard 94.3.

D. Snap Switches: quiet type AC switches as indicated in Table 2 in Part 3 below. Comply with UL 20

and NEMA WD1.

2.3 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES

A. Wall plates: single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as required. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Provide wall plates with engraved legend where required. Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features:

1. Material and Finish: 0.04 inch thick, type 302 satin finished. 2. Material and Finish: steel plate, galvanized, limited to mechanical rooms only.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Install wiring devices and accessories, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as

necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work.

C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from building materials, dirt, and debris.

D. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.

E. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.

F. Install telephone/power service connections in accordance with final furnishings arrangement

plan, plumb, true, and secure.

G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment


SECTION 16143



manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six times.

B. Test ground fault interruptor operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance

with manufacturer recommendations. C. TABLE 1

RECEPTACLES DESIG- CURRENT NEMA NATION RATING VOLTAGE SINGLE/ CONFIG- (1) AMPS RATING DUPLEX URATION UL GRADE NOTES - 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY

DUTY - 20 125 SINGLE 5-20R HEAVY

DUTY GFCI 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY INTEGRAL

DUTY GFCI WP 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY INTEGRAL GFCI DUTY GFCI

NOTES (1) Letter designations are used where symbols alone do not clearly designate on plans

locations where specific receptacle types are used.

D. TABLE 2

SNAP SWITCHES DESIG- VOLTAGE NATION TYPICAL LOAD RATING (1) APPLICATION RATING (AC) POLES UL GRADE NOTES


SECTION 16143



S CONTROL 20A 120/277 1 HEAVY DUTY - LIGHTS

S3 CONTROL 20A 120/277 3-way HEAVY DUTY - LIGHTS

S DISCONN. 1HP 120/277 1 HEAVY DUTY (2) MOTOR

STOL DISCONN. 2HP 208/480 1 HEAVY DUTY (2) MOTOR

NOTES

(1) For snap switches, designation is the same as the symbol used on plans for the device. Type of switch is determined from plan context including type of device or circuit being controlled.

(2) With overload element in switch.


DIVISION 16 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS

SECTION 16170




A. This Section includes circuit and motor disconnects. 1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of product specified.

B. Maintenance data for circuit and motor disconnects, for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements."


A. Electrical Component Standards: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" and which are listed and labeled by UL. Comply with UL Standard 98 and NEMA Standard KS 1.



1. Crouse-Hinds Co. 2. Cutler-Hammer Inc. 3. General Electric Co. 4. Siemens 5. Square D Company.

2.2 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches in types, sizes, duties, features ratings, and enclosures required by NEC for load served. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure in interior locations except in wet/damp locations provide NEMA 3R. Provide NEMA 3R enclosures with raintight hubs in exterior locations.. For motor and motor starter disconnects, provide units with horsepower ratings and starters suitable to the loads.

B. Fusible Switches: heavy duty switches, with fuses of classes and current ratings required by NEC

for load served. Where current limiting fuses are required, provide switches with non-interchangeable feature suitable only for current limiting type fuses.

C. Non-fusible Disconnects: heavy duty switches of classes and current ratings as required by NEC

for load served.

D. Double-Throw Switches: heavy duty switches of classes and current ratings as required by NEC for load served

DIVISION 16 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS

SECTION 16170



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS

A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches where required by code. Comply with switch manufacturers' printed installation instructions.


A. Testing: Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuits and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Do not test switches by operating them under load. However, demonstrate switch operation through six opening/closing cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure for inspection of interior, mechanical and electrical connections, fuse installation, and for verification of type and rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective units with new units and retest.


DIVISION 16 SUPPORTING DEVICES

SECTION 16190






1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of product specified.

1. Hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, spacing,

features, and application for each required type of hanger, support, sleeve, seal, and fastener to be used.

C. Shop drawings indicating details of fabricated products and materials.

D. Engineered Design consisting of details and engineering analysis for supports for the following

items:

1. Fastener supporting systems. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National

Electrical Code."

B. Electrical components shall be listed and labeled by UL, ETL, CSA, or other approved, nationally recognized testing and listing agency that provides third-party certification follow-up services.



1. Slotted Metal Angle and U-Channel Systems:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit b. American Electric c. B-Line Systems, Inc. d. Cinch Clamp Co., Inc. e. GS Metals Corp.


SECTION 16190



f. Haydon Corp. g. Kin-Line, Inc. h. Unistrut Diversified Products

2. Conduit Sealing Bushings:

a. Bridgeport Fittings, Inc. b. Cooper Industries, Inc. c. Elliott Electric Mfg. Corp. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Killark Electric Mfg. Co. f. Madison Equipment Co. g. L.E. Mason Co. h. O-Z/Gedney i. Producto Electric Corp. j. Raco, Inc. k. Red Seal Electric Corp. l. Spring City Electrical Mgf. Co. m. Thomas & Betts Corp.

2.2 COATINGS

A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be hot-dip galvanized.

2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps.

B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows:

1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type. 2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.

C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies

suitable for sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and

insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

E. U-Channel Systems: 16-gage steel channels, with 9/16-inch-diameter holes, at a minimum of 8

inches on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacture.

2.4 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. General: Shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components.


SECTION 16190



B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect

with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal for sleeve diameter noted:

a. 3-inch and smaller: 20-gage. b. 4-inch to 6-inch: 16-gage. c. over 6-inch: 14-gage.

2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements.

B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation. C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements:

1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports. 2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by a

safety factor of at least four. Where this determination results in a safety allowance of less than 200 lbs, provide additional strength until there is a minimum of 200 lbs safety allowance in the strength of each support.

3. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

4. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers. 5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners

may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4-inch-diameter or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing.

6. Space supports for raceways in accordance with Table I of this section. Space supports for raceway types not covered by the above in accordance with NEC.

7. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1 foot of an unsupported box and access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings may be omitted where box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples or threadless box connectors.

8. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals.

D. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors.

E. Miscellaneous Supports: Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the

same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for


SECTION 16190



mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices.

F. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be supported separately

except where used for fixture support; support sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. Where bar hangers are used, attach the bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved type of fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.

G. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire-rated floors and walls for raceways

and cable installations. For sleeves through fire rated-wall or floor construction, apply UL- listed firestopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables in accordance with requirements specified elsewhere.

H. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below

grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal.

I. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware

securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with the following:

1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow

masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws.

2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.

3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock- resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.

J. TESTS: Test pull-out resistance of one of each type, size, and anchorage material for the following

fastener types:

1. Expansion anchors. 2. Toggle bolts.

K. Provide all jacks, jigs, fixtures, and calibrated indicating scales required for reliable testing. Obtain

the structural Engineer's approval before transmitting loads to the structure. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load for fastener. If fastening fails test, revise all similar fastener installations and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.

L. Conduit seals at walk-in cooler& freezer location: Install seals for conduit penetrations into cooler

or freezer equipment where conduit enters the repsective conditional areas, and at slab locations. 3.2 Table I: Spacing for Raceway Supports

HORIZONTAL RUNS Raceway No. of RSC, IMC, Size Conductors EMT (Inches) in Run Location (1)


SECTION 16190



1/2,3/4 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall. 5 1/2,3/4 1 or 2 Where it is difficult to 7

provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction.

1/2,3/4 3 or more Any location. 7 1/2-1 3 or more Any location. 7 1 & larger 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall. 6 1 & larger 1 or 2 Where it is difficult 10

to provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction.

1 & larger 3 or more Any location. 10 An .... Concealed. 10 VERTICAL RUNS

No. of RSC, IMC Raceway Size Conductors EMT (Inches) in Run Location (1,2) 1/2,3/4 .... Exposed. 7 1,1-1/4 .... Exposed. 8 1-1/2 and larger .... Exposed. 10 Up to 2 .... Shaftway. 14 2-1/2 .... Shaftway. 16 3 & larger .... Shaftway. 20 Any .... Concealed. 10 NOTES: (1) Maximum spacing of supports (feet). (2) Maximum spacing for IMC above apply to straight runs only. Abbreviations: IMC Intermediate metallic conduit. RSC Rigid steel conduit.

EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing



SECTION 16190




DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 16195






1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following:

1. Identification labeling for switchboards, panelboards, devices, raceways, cables, and

conductors. 2. Operational instruction signs. 3. Warning and caution signs. 4. Equipment labels and signs.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for requirements for color coding of conductors for

phase identification.

C. Refer to other Division 16 sections for additional specific electrical identification associated with specific items.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data for each type of product specified.

C. Schedule of identification nomenclature to be used for identification signs and labels.

D. Samples of each color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for identification

materials; samples of labels and signs. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

B. ANSI Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard A13.1, "Scheme for the

Identification of Piping Systems," with regard to type and size of lettering for raceway and cable labels.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering


SECTION 16195



products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Labelmark Co. 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. LEM Products, Inc. 4. National Band and Tag Co. 5. Panduit Corp. 6. Seton Name Plate Co. 7. Standard Signs, Inc. 8. W.H.Brady, Co.

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Adhesive Marking Labels for Raceway and Cable: Pre-printed, flexible, self-adhesive labels with legend indicating voltage and service (Emergency, Lighting, Power, Light, Air Conditioning, Communications, Control, Fire, etc.).

B. Label Size: as follows:

1. Raceways 1-Inch and Smaller: 1-1/8 inches high by 4 inches long. 2. Raceways Larger than 1-Inch: 1-1/8 inches high by 8 inches long.

C. Color: Black legend on orange background. D. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not

less than 3 mils thick by 1 inch to 2 inches in width.

E. Pretensioned Flexible Wraparound Colored Plastic Sleeves for Raceway and Cable Identification: Flexible acrylic bands sized to suit the raceway diameter and arranged to stay in place by pretensioned gripping action when coiled around the raceway or cable.

F. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self- adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor markers with preprinted numbers and letter.

G. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends to suit the

application. Orange background, except as otherwise indicated, with Eyelet for fastener.

H. Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in white letters on black face and punched for mechanical fasteners.

I. Baked-Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched

for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location.

J. Exterior Metal-Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20-gage, galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

K. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated and Metal Signs: Self-tapping stainless steel screws or number

10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

L. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 deg F to 350 deg F. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding.


SECTION 16195




A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code.

B. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and

requirements of NEC.

C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work.

D. Conduit Identification:

1. The following areas shall be identified:

a. On wall surfaces directly external to conduits run concealed within wall. b. On all accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around conduits in vertical shafts,

exposed at ceilings or concealed above suspended ceilings. 2. Apply identification to areas as follows:

a. Clean surface of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. b. Prime surfaces: For galvanized metal, use single-component acrylic vehicle coating

formulated for galvanized surfaces. For concrete masonry units, use heavy-duty acrylic resin block filler. For concrete surfaces, use clear alkali- resistant alkyd binder-type sealer.

c. Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of orange silicone alkyd enamel. d. Apply primer and finish materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed or accessible raceways

of the following systems for identification. Bands shall be pretensioned, snap-around colored plastic sleeves, colored adhesive marking tape, or a combination of the two. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Install bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at 40-foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply the following colors: 1. Fire Alarm System: Red 2. Fire Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red 3. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and Blue 4. Telephone System: Green and Yellow

F. Identify Junction, Pull, and Connection Boxes: Code-required caution sign for boxes shall be

pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange background. Install on outside of box cover. Also label box covers with identity of contained circuits. Use pressure- sensitive plastic labels at exposed locations and similar labels or plasticized card stock tags at concealed boxes.

G. Conductor Color Coding: Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit

conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows:


SECTION 16195



208Y/120 Volts Phase

Black A Red B Blue C White Neutral Green Ground

H. Use conductors with color factory-applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows:

1. The following field-applied color-coding methods may be used in lieu of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG.

a. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half- lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch-wide tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration.

b. In lieu of pressure-sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color identification. Apply three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal and spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length.

I. Tag or label conductors as follows:

1. Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under another contract with identification indicating source and circuit numbers.

2. Multiple Circuits: Where multiple branch circuits or control wiring or signal conductors are present in the same box or enclosure (except for three-circuit, four-wire home runs), label each conductor or cable. Provide legend indicating source, voltage, circuit number, and phase for branch circuit wiring. Phase and voltage of branch circuit wiring may be indicated by mean of coded color of conductor insulation. For control and signal wiring, use color coding or wire marking tape at terminations and at intermediate locations where conductors appear in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire marking tapes.

3. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards shop drawings, Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facility's electrical installations.

J. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows:

1. Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic- laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items.

K. Install equipment identification as follows:

1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic- laminate on each major unit of

electrical equipment in building, including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with 1/2-inch-high lettering on 1-1/2-inch-high label (2-inch-high where two lines are required), white lettering


SECTION 16195



in black field. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment.

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. d. Motor starters. e. Pushbutton stations. f. Contactors. g. Control devices. h. Transformers. i. Fire alarm master station or control panel. j. Security monitoring master station or control panel.

L. Apply designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker.

M. Install labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without

interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.



SECTION 16195




DIVISION 16 GROUNDING

SECTION 16452




A. This Section includes solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. It includes basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables."

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for ground rods, connectors and connection materials, and grounding fittings.

C. Field-testing organization certificate, signed by the Contractor, certifying that the organization

performing field tests complies with the requirements specified in Quality Assurance below.

D. Report of field tests and observations certified by the testing organization. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. The terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be defined as they are in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

1. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory"

(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

B. Field-Testing Organization Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, the independent testing organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organization-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated.

C. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70,

"National Electrical Code" (NEC). D. UL Standard: Comply with UL 467, "Grounding and Bonding Equipment."



1. Anixter Bros., Inc. 2. Bashlin Industries, Inc.


SECTION 16452



3. Buckingham Mfg. Co. 4. A.B. Chance Co. 5. Dossert Corp. 6. Engineered Products Co. 7. Erico Products, Inc. 8. Galvan Industries, Inc. 9. GB Electrical, Inc. 10. General Machine Products Co., Inc. 11. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. 12. Ideal Industries, Inc. 13. Kearney-National. 14. McGill Mfg. 15. O-Z/Gedney Co. 16. Raco, Inc. 17. Thomas & Betts Corp. 18. W.H. Salisbury & Co. 19. Utilco Co.

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS

A. Products: Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEC. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.

B. Conductor Materials: Copper.

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE CONDUCTORS

A. General: Comply with Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables." Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding.

B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Green insulated.

C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Stranded cable. D. Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to the following:

1. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B-8.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS

A. Ground Bus: Bare annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section.

B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 30 gage bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.

C. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide, except as

indicated. 2.5 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. General: Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials used.

B. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units.


SECTION 16452



C. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application.

D. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes,

and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected.

E. Aluminum-To-Copper Connections: Bimetallic type, conforming to UL 96, "Lighting Protection Components," or UL 467.

2.6 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic-grade copper outer sheath, molten welded to core.

1. Size: 3/4 inch by 10 feet. 2. Size: 5/8 inch by 8 feet.

B. Plate Electrodes: Copper plates, minimum 0.10 inch thick, size as required per N.E.C. indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Equipment Grounding Conductor Application: Comply with NEC Article 250 for sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where larger sizes or more conductors are indicated.

1. Install separate insulated equipment grounding conductors with circuit conductors for the

following in addition to those locations where required by Code:

a. Lighting circuits. b. Feeders and branch circuits. c. Receptacle Circuits. d. Single-phase motor or appliance circuits. e. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits.

2. Busway Circuits: Install separate insulated equipment ground conductor from the ground

bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to the equipment ground terminal on the busway.

3. Elevator Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to electrical devices operating at 120-V and above including hard-wired and plug-cord assemblies. Bond the conductor to each such unit and in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

4. Special systems: Provide isolated ground feeder back through each IDF & MDF room. Bond conductor back to building ground.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment in accordance with NEC requirements except where the Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements.

B. Braided-Type Bonding Jumpers: Install to connect ground clamps on water meter piping to

bypass water meters electrically. Use elsewhere for flexible bonding and grounding connections.


SECTION 16452



C. Route grounding conductors along the shortest and straightest paths possible without obstructing

access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage, except as indicated.

D. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment ground conductors of pumps,

fans, electric heaters, and air cleaners serving individual systems. 3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact

points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact. 3. Aluminum to steel connections shall be with stainless steel separators and mechanical

clamps. 4. Aluminum to galvanized steel connections shall be with tin-plated copper jumpers and

mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red lead

paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

B. Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits with pressure-type grounding lugs. Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic housings without mechanical and electrical connection to the housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the ground bus in the housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors.

C. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

D. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct

circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground conductor.

E. Moisture Protection: Where insulated ground conductors are connected to ground rods or ground

buses, insulate the entire area of the connection and seal against moisture penetration of the insulation and cable.


A. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of a qualified independent electrical testing organization to perform tests described below.

B. Tests: Subject the completed grounding system to a megger test at each location where a

maximum ground resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure ground terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural precipitation or natural drainage or seepage and without chemical


SECTION 16452



treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by the 2-point method in accordance with Section 9.03 of IEEE 81, "Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System."

C. Ground/resistance maximum values shall be as follows:

1. Equipment rated 500 kVA and less: 10 Ohms 2. Equipment rated 500 kVA to 1000 kVA: 5 Ohms

D. Deficiencies: Where ground resistances exceed specified values, and if directed, modify the

grounding system to reduce resistance values. Where measures are directed that exceed those indicated the provisions of the Contract, covering changes will apply.

E. Report: Prepare test reports, certified by the testing organization, of the ground resistance at each

test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.



SECTION 16452




DIVISION 16 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

SECTION 16475




A. This Section includes overcurrent protective devices (OCPDs) rated 600 V and below and switching devices commonly used with them.

B. Panelboards: Application, installation, and other related requirements for overcurrent protective

device installations in distribution equipment are specified in other Division 16 sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Cartridge Fuses:

a. Bussmann Div., Cooper Industries, Inc. b. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. c. General Electric Co. d. Gould Inc. e. Littelfuse Inc.

2. Fusible Switches:

a. Allen-Bradley Co. b. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp. c. Crouse-Hinds Distribution Equipment. d. Eaton Corp. e. General Electric Co. f. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. g. Square D Co. h. Westinghouse Electric Co.

3. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:

a. General Electric Co. b. GTE Sylvania c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D Co. e. Westinghouse Electric Corp.

2.2 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES (OCPDs), GENERAL

A. General: Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards and also as individually enclosed and mounted single units.

B. General: Provide OCPDs in indicated types, as integral components of panelboards,

switchboards, and motor control centers; and also as individually enclosed and mounted single units.

C. Enclosures: NEMA 250 "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum)."


SECTION 16475



2.3 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. General: NEMA Standard FU1, "Low-Voltage Cartridge Fuses." Unless indicated otherwise, provide nonrenewable cartridge fuses of indicated types, classes, and current ratings that have voltage ratings consistent with the circuits on which used.

B. Class J Fuses: UL 198C, "High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current-Limiting Type."

C. Class L Fuses: UL 198C, "High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses, Current-Limiting Type."

D. Class RK1 and RK5 Dual Element Time-Delay Fuses: UL 198E, "Class R Fuses."

E. Class RK1 Fast-Acting Fuses: UL 198E, "Class R Fuses."

2.4 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. General: UL 98 "Enclosed and Dead Front Switches" and NEMA KS 1 "Enclosed Switches," quick-make, quick-break heavy-duty units.

B. Rating: Load-breaking capacity in excess of the normal horsepower rating for the switch.

C. Withstand Capability: In excess of the let-through current permitted by its fuse when subject to

faults up to 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.

D. Operation: By means of external handle. E. Interlock: Prevents access to switch interior except when in "off" position.

F. Fuse Clips: Rejection type. G. Padlocking Provisions: For 2 padlocks, whether open or closed.

H. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure except as otherwise indicated or

required to suit environment where located. 2.5 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. General: UL 489, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures," and NEMA AB 1, "Molded Case Circuit Breakers."

B. Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger may be plug-in type

if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal.

C. Construction: Bolt-in type, except breakers in load-center-type panelboards and breakers 225-ampere frame size and larger may be plug-in type if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal.

D. Characteristics: Indicated frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and a short-circuit interrupting

capacity rating of 10,000 amperes symmetrical, unless a greater rating is indicated.

E. Tripping Device: Quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanism with inverse-time delay and instantaneous overcurrent trip protection for each pole.


SECTION 16475



F. Enclosure for Panelboard Mounting: Suitable for panel mounting in switchboard or panelboards

where indicated.

G. Enclosure for Independent Mounting: NEMA Type 1 enclosure, except as otherwise indicated or required to suit environment where located.


A. Independently Mounted OCPDs: Locate as indicated and install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. OCPDs in distribution equipment shall be factory installed.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components in accordance with Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification." 3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between OCPDs and control/indication devices as specified in Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for hard wired connections.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Check connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings for tightness. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for individually mounted OCPD units as indicated and as required by NEC. Tighten connectors to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.


A. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an independent electrical testing organization to perform tests and observations on OCPDs.

B. Reports: Prepare written reports certified by testing organization on tests and observations.

Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include complete records of repairs and adjustments made.

C. Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply a label to tested

components indicating test results, date, and responsible organization and person.

D. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one week's advance notification.


SECTION 16475



E. Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, perform the following preparations for

independent tests:

1. Make insulation resistance tests of OCPD buses, components, and connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits.

2. Make continuity tests of circuits. 3. Provide set of Contract Documents to test personnel. Include full updating on final system

configuration and parameters where they supplement or differ from those indicated in original Contract Documents.

4. Provide manufacturer's instructions for installation and testing of OCPDs to test personnel.

F. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include the following inspections and related work.

1. Overcurrent-Protective-Device Ratings and Settings: Verify indicated ratings and settings to be appropriate for final system arrangement and parameters. Where discrepancies are found, test organization shall recommend final protective device ratings and settings. Use accepted revised ratings or settings to make the final system adjustments.

2. Inspect for defects and physical damage, NRTL labeling, and nameplate compliance with current single line diagram.

3. Exercise and perform operational tests of all mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.

4. Check tightness of electrical connections of OCPDs with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.

5. Clean OCPDs using manufacturer's approved methods and materials. 6. Verify installation of proper fuse types and ratings in fusible OCPDs.

G. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions:

1. Insulation resistance test of OCPD conducting parts. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable.

2. Contact resistance test or measurement of millivolt drop across contacts of drawout circuit breakers and fused power circuit devices at rated current. Compare contact resistance or millivolt drop values of adjacent poles and of similar breakers. Deviations of more than 50 percent are not acceptable.

3. Insulation resistance test of fused power circuit devices and insulated-case and molded-case circuit breakers over 600-ampere frame size at 1000 V d.c. for one minute from pole to pole and from each pole to ground with breaker closed and across open contacts of each phase. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable.

4. Use primary current injection to check performance characteristics of trip units of molded-case breakers over 600-ampere frame size. Trip characteristics not falling within manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance bands when adjusted to approved parameters are not acceptable. Perform the following tests:

a. Determine minimum pickup current acceptable per manufacturer's instructions. b. Determine long-time delay at 300 percent pickup current. c. Determine short-time-pickup current and corresponding delay time. d. Determine ground-fault current pickup and corresponding delay time. e. Determine instantaneous pickup current value.

5. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable-trip devices. 6. Activate auxiliary protective devices such as ground fault or undervoltage relays, to verify

operation of shunt-trip devices.


SECTION 16475



7. Check operation of electrically operated OCPDs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and provide retesting of OCPDs

by testing organization. Verify by the system tests that specified requirements are met. 3.7 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of installation, inspect OCPDs. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of factory-authorized service representatives to demonstrate OCPDs and train Owner's maintenance personnel.

B. Conduct a minimum of one half day of training in operation and maintenance as specified under

"Instructions to Owner Employees" in the "Project Closeout" Section of these specifications. Include both classroom training and hands-on equipment operation and maintenance procedures.

C. Schedule training with at least seven days' advance notification.

3.9 COMMISSIONING

A. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 2 months after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of OCPDs including their line and load connections, fuses, and fuse clips. Also scan OCPD contact structures where accessible to a portable scanner. Include individual OCPDs and those installed in switchboards, panelboards, and motor control centers.

B. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform two additional follow-up infrared scans of the same devices:

one four months after Substantial Completion, and one 11 months after Substantial Completion.

C. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

D. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report identifying all OCPDs checked and

describing results of scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and rescanning observations after remedial action.



SECTION 16475




DIVISION 16 LIGHTING

SECTION 16515


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 1 of 6`



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Interior solid-state luminaires that use LED technology. 2. Lighting fixture supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data describing fixtures, lamps and emergency lighting units. Arrange product data for

fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories and the following information:

1. Outline drawings of fixtures indicating dimensions and principal features. 2. Electrical ratings and photometric data with specified lamps and certified results of

independent laboratory tests. 3. Data on batteries and chargers of emergency lighting units.

C. Maintenance data for products for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in

Division 1.

D. Product certifications signed by manufacturers of lighting fixtures certifying that their fixtures comply with specified requirements.

E. Shop drawings from manufactures detailing nonstandard fixtures and indicating dimensions,


SECTION 16515


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 2 of 6`

weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.

F. Coordination drawings for fixtures mounted on, in, or above the ceiling indicating coordination with ceiling grids and other equipment installed in the same space.

G. Samples for verification purposes of specific individual fixtures.

H. Samples for use in full size mockup of specific individual fixtures.


A. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" for components and installation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide fixtures and emergency lighting units that are listed and labeled for their indicated use on the Project.

1. The terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article

100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualification: A "Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

C. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms experienced in manufacturing fixtures that are similar to those indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Coordination of Fixtures With Ceiling: Coordinate fixtures mounting hardware and trim with the

ceiling system. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials matching products installed, as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner.

1. Lamps: 10 lamps for each 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1 of

each type. 2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for each 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish

at least 1 of each type. 3. Globes and Guards: 1 for each 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least 1 of

each type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Comply with the requirements specified in the Articles below and lighting fixture schedule as specified on drawings.

2.2 FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL

A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs and sharp corners and edges.


SECTION 16515


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 3 of 6`

B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Components are formed and supported to prevent warping and sagging.

C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating and free from light leakage

under operating conditions. Arrange to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in the operating position.

D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectances as follows, except as otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.

E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic or water white,

annealed crystal glass except as indicated.

1. Plastic: Highly resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat and UV radiation.

2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inches, minimum. 2.3 SUSPENDED FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Suspended fixtures as indicated in manufacturer’s installation instructions. See fixture schedule for further requirements.

2.4 LED FIXTURES

A. Fixtures, Basis of design: CREE ZR Series. ZR 22 2’x2’ LED Troffer and ZR 24 2’x4’ LED Troffer. Conform to UL 1570, "Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

H. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

I. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL.

J. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

K. Bulb shape complying with ANSI C79.1.

L. Lamp base complying with ANSI C81.61.

M. CRI of 90. CCT of 3,500K, 4000K.

N. Rated lamp life of 75,00 to 100,000 hours.

O. Lamps dimmable from 100 percent to 0 percent of maximum light output.


SECTION 16515


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 4 of 6`

P. Internal driver.

Q. Nominal Operating Voltage: 120 – 277V.

1. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

R. Housings:

1. Cold rolled steel housing and heat sink. 2. Painted finish.

2.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Conform to UL 924, "Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment" requirements for "Unit

Equipment." Provide self-contained units with the following features and additional characteristics as indicated.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type with 10 year nominal life minimum, and

special project warranty. 2. Charger: Minimum two-rate, fully-automatic, solid-state type, with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when supply circuit voltage drops to 80-

percent of nominal or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. Relay disconnects lamps and battery automatically recharges and floats on trickle charge when normal voltage is restored.

4. Time-Delay Relay: Provide time-delay relay in emergency lighting unit control circuit arranged to hold unit "on" for fixed interval after restoration of power from an outage

2.6 EXIT SIGNS

A. Conform to UL 924, "Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment," and the following:

1. Sign Colors: Conform to local code. 2. Minimum Height of Letters: Conform to local code. 3. Arrows: Include as indicated. 4. Lamps: Light Emitting Diodes (LED), 20 year rated lamp life.

2.7 LAMPS

A. Conform to ANSI Standards, C78 series applicable to each type of lamp. 2.8 FINISH

A. Steel Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish applied over corrosion-resistant primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters, and defects. Remove fixtures showing evidence of corrosion during project warranty period and replace with new fixtures.

B. Other Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish.



SECTION 16515


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 5 of 6`

A. Setting and Securing: Set units plumb, square, and level with ceiling and walls, and secure according to manufacturer's printed instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Support For Recessed and Semi-recessed Fixtures: Installed units are not to be supported

from suspended ceiling support system. Install ceiling system support rods or wires at a minimum of four rods or wires per fixture located not more than 6 inches from fixture corners.

1. Fixtures Smaller Than Ceiling Grid: Install a minimum of four rods or wires for each

fixture and locate at corner of the ceiling grid where the fixture is located. Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels.

2. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Center in the acoustical panel. Support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to the ceiling tees.

3. Install support clips for recessed fixtures, securely fastened to ceiling grid members, at or near each fixture corners.

C. Support for Suspended Fixtures: Brace pendants and rods that are 4-feet long or longer to

limit swinging. Support stem mounted single-unit suspended fluorescent fixtures with twin-stem hangers. For continuous rows, use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of chassis, including one at each end.

D. Lamping: Lamp units according to manufacturer's instructions.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Give advance notice of dates and times for field tests.

C. Provide instruments to make and record test results.

D. Tests: Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been energized with normal power source. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation of emergency lighting installation. Include the following in tests of emergency lighting equipment.

1. Duration of supply with battery system. 2. Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.

E. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until

all units operate properly. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures upon completion of installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities.



SECTION 16515


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 6 of 6`


DIVISION 16 FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS

SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 1 of 20

PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The general provisions of the contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Division 1 Specification sections apply to the work of this Section.

Section 15000 - General Conditions, and division – 1 Specification sections apply to the work of this Section.

Section 16000 – General Provisions for Electrical work apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide labor, equipment, materials, services and transportation necessary for complete and operational multiplexed, addressable life safety fire alarm systems as shown on Contract Drawings and specified herein, including but not limited to the following:

1. All necessary modules

2. Addressable detection, initiation, control and monitor devices

3. Signaling devices – Speaker/strobe units. Strobe units

4. Addressable relay modules

5. Programming and other necessary modifications to new building fire alarm panel being installed under separate contract.

6. System programming and testing

7. Area of refuge intercom system

8. Warrantee

B. Substitutions

1. Bids shall be based on the proprietary Edwards EST Signature Series equipment to match the existing system. No other systems will be acceptable in the Contractor’s bid.

2. With bid, furnish data sheets, diagrams and specifications of complete system.

3. Fire Alarm Contractor supplying the EST3 system must be an EST Strategic partner.

C. Warrantee and service all devices, wiring, equipment and installation for one year from time of acceptance of that portion of the system by the Owner, Programming shall be updated as necessary over the entire construction period. Warrantee and service all main hardware, including fire alarm control panel, for one year beyond final acceptance of the entire building fire alarm system.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

The work covered by this section of the specifications shall be coordinated with the other sections related to work.

1.4 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The system shall be covered under a complete parts and labor warranty for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. Warranty service shall include all emergency service for equipment or component failures and two preventative maintenance visits scheduled at six month intervals.


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 2 of 20

B. The Contractor shall note this section specifies the proprietary Edwards EST Addressable System as provided by an EST approved vendor. Due to the fact that work specified in this section modifies and extends an existing campus wide system and that these modifications will impact the system, all system programming and system connections shall be done by the Agency approved fire alarm contractor

C. All keys used for access to fire alarm equipment shall match Owner’s existing EST system keys.

D. Davidson Hall Fire Alarm System shall be programmed into the color graphics display monitor located at the Campus Police Station.

E. At the completion of the project, The approved Vendor shall supply to C.C.S.U. as-built drawings, AutoCad drawings and software to C.C.S.U.

F. The approved Vendor shall provide 4 hours of training to the facility on the maintenance, diagnostic, operation and troubleshooting of this fire alarm system.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for review shop drawings on following:

1. Fire alarm control panel modules

2. Heat and smoke detectors

3. Speaker/strobe units

4. Strobe units

5. Fire alarm pull stations

6. Battery units – with sizing calculations

7. Wire and cable

8. Manufacturer’s or vendor’s UL-UUJS certification, certificate number and UL listing as per UL issued certification.

9. Area of refuge intercom system.

10. A notarized letter from the Contractor indicating compliance with code and compatibility with central campus system.

B. Submit samples as requested.

C. Provide manufacturer’s roughing-in diagrams and written product specification and instruction for installation, operation and maintenance, suitable for inclusion in maintenance manuals.

D. Include copies of manufacturer’s published product warranties. Include standard or typical riser and

wiring diagrams.

E. Provide shop drawings showing equipment and device locations and connecting wiring for the entire system in riser format. Include point to point wiring in riser diagrams and battery calculations.

F. Riser diagram shall be a Computer Aided Drafting produced drawing that is compatible with and

readable by the Owners and Engineers CAD systems. (AutoCad) 1.6 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Prior to final inspection and instruction period, deliver following items in duplicate to Architect.


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 3 of 20

1. Certificate by manufacturer of fire alarm system, stating that system has been properly

installed, adjusted and tested.

2. Complete operating and maintenance manuals including wiring diagrams, technical data sheets and information for ordering replacement parts.

3. CAD discs with “As Built” riser diagrams which indicate each piece of equipment and interconnecting wiring.

4. Complete diagrams of internal wiring for each piece of equipment, including “as built” revisions. Diagrams shall identify wiring operation and maintenance.


A. Catalog numbers are those for an Edwards EST System and represent the type, quality and operating characteristics of the equipment required. All equipment shall be supplied and serviced by a factory authorized dealer and shall be from one manufacturer with a minimum of 8 years experience in supply and servicing of fire alarms systems and maintain a direct factory sales and service local branch office, within a reasonable distance from the site, employing factory trained service technicians, Branch office shall have 24-hour service availability.

1. Approved vendors: TPC Associates, inc.

261 Pepe’s FARM Road. Milford, CT (203) 878-1321 (Al Sullivan)

NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO OBTAIN SERVICES OF AND COORDINATE WITH FIRE ALARM SUPPLIER AND PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY MODIFICATION AND REPROGRAMMING OF THE EXISTING FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL AND COLOR GRAPHICS AT THE CAMPUS POLICE DEPARTMENT TO INDICATE THAT THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM HAS BEEN ACTIVATED.

B. This installation shall be made in accordance with the drawings, specification and the following:

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code.

3. NFPA 101A Life Safety Code

4. ANSI A117.1-2003 Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities

5. International Building Code

6. Local codes and Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

7. All fire alarm components shall be UL listed for their application.

C. Wiring requirements for shielding certain conductors from others or routing in separate raceways shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Contractor shall request all special installation requirements from the manufacturer and include in his bid price.

D. The system including all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use a fire protective signaling system.

E. The system and components shall be supplied by one manufacturer of established reputation and

experience who shall have produced similar apparatus for a period of at least three (3) years and who shall be able to refer to similar installations rendering satisfactory service. All references to


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 4 of 20

model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, quality and construction.

F. All material and equipment shall be new and unused.

G. All individual components and composite systems shall be designed for continuous operation without

undue heating or change in rated values, and shall be properly fused. 1.8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Work shall include all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for installation of complete power-limited, microprocessor based, multiplex, addressable device type life safety systems with battery standby for fire control and evacuation, to be connected to the existing building fire alarm control panel as described herein. Locations of controls, alarm initiation devices, and alarm signal devices shall be as show on the drawings. System shall be wired, zoned, addressed, electrically supervised, connected, tested, and left in fully operation condition.

B. Expand campus central system control panel color graphics, data loops to Campus Police Station

as required to monitor the proposed additional devices. All necessary modifications shall be accomplished without central campus system “shut-down” of any existing functions.

C. Local fire alarm control panel shall monitor status of detection and alarm conditions for all new

Signature type devices. Each power supply shall have sufficient capacity to operate all equipment to be connected under this contract with additional minimum spare capacity of 25 percent.

D. All controls panels shall be provided with 24VDC battery back-up of sufficient capacity to operated

and supervise all connected equipment for minimum 60 hours with primary (AC) power disconnected, after which time batteries shall have sufficient capacity to operate all connected equipment in alarm mode.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE

A. EST Signature Series Intelligent Analog Devices.

2.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All equipment shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be designed for

uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be provided by a single manufacturer or if provided by different manufacturers, recognized as compatible by both manufacturers.

2.3 ADDITIONS AND RETROFIT

A. The system shall be capable of detecting the electrical location of each new intelligent Signature type device. It shall be possible to display the intelligent device map on the laptop PC. It shall be possible for authorized service personnel using Signature Series SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool or laptop PC to change the personality/function of a Signature Series Device to meet changes in building layout or environment.


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 5 of 20

B. System changes shall be verified by the manufacturer’s representative and a verification certificate presented upon completion.

2.4 CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS

A. This Life Safety System Specification must be conformed to in its entirety to ensure that the installed and programmed Life Safety System will accommodate all of the future requirements and operations required by the building owner. Any specified item or operational feature not specifically addressed prior to bid date will be required to be met without exception.

B. Any deviation from the equipment, operations, methods, design or other criteria specified herein must be submitted in detail to the Specifying Architect or Engineer a minimum of 10 working days prior to the scheduled submission of bids. Each deviation from the operation detailed in these specifications must be documented in detail, including Page Number and Section Number that lists the system function for which the substitution is being proposed.

2.5 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All equipment furnished for this project shall be new and unused. All components and systems shall be designed for uninterrupted duty. All equipment, materials, accessories, devices, and other facilities covered by this specification or noted on contract drawings and installation specifications shall be the best suited for the intended use and shall be provided by a single manufacturer. If any of the equipment provided under this Specification is provided by different manufacturers, then that equipment shall be recognized as compatible by both manufacturers, and “Listed” as such by Underwriters’ Laboratories.

B. System installation and operations shall be verified by the manufacturer’s representative and a verification certificate presented upon completion. The manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for an on-site demonstration of the operation of the system and initial staff training as required by the Architect and/or Consulting Engineer.

C. The system shall be capable of detecting the electrical location of each Signature intelligent device including new and existing devices. It shall be possible to display the intelligent device map on the laptop PC.

If a device map cannot be generated by the Control Panel, the contractor must include a minimum of (3) days to verify location of all wire runs while in the presence of the Architect/Engineer or Building Owners Representative to verify all conduit and wire runs.

In addition, “As-Built” riser and wiring diagrams reflecting all T-Taps, each programmed device characteristic including detector type, base type, serial number, sensitivity setting and wire configurations will be provided to the Architect/Engineer, based on the information gathered during the verification process described above.

D. It shall be possible for authorized service personnel using a Program/Service Tool or laptop PC to change the personality/function of a Signature Series Device to meet changes in building layout or environment. System changes shall be verified by the manufacturer’s representative and a verification certificate presented upon completion.

2.6 MANUFACTURERS

A. Equipment and materials shall be provided by Authorized Engineered Systems Distributor Name to ensure proper Specification Adherence, final connection, test, turnover, warranty compliance, and service.

B. Service availability: The supplier shall have sufficient stock on hand and have a fully equipped service organization capable of guaranteeing response time within 8 hours of service calls, 24 hours a day, 7 days a week to service completed systems.


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 6 of 20

C. The Engineered Systems Distributor of the Fire Alarm / Life Safety Equipment specified herein shall provide a copy of their certificate of successful completion of an authorized Training Course given by the Manufacturer of the Fire Alarm / Life Safety Equipment.

2.7 EQUIPMENT

A. The Life Safety System shall include all required hardware and system programming to provide a complete and operational system.

2.8 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM OPERATIONS INTERFACE:

A. SDC Card

1. The Signature Device Card (SDC) shall be the interface between the Fire Alarm Control Panel and the Signature Series Detectors and Modules.

2. The communications format between the SDC and the Signature Series Devices shall be 100% digital. Communications to devices must incorporate BROADCAST POLLING and DIRECT ADDRESS SEARCH to ensure the fastest reporting of off-normal conditions to the system human interface layer.

3. It shall be possible to wire the SDC as Class A (Style 6 or Style 7) or Class B (Style 4) without twisted or shielded wire. It must be possible to wire branch circuits (T-Taps) from Class B Circuits.

4. The associated controller (3-SSDC), through the SDC, shall provide the ability to set the sensitivity and alarm verification of each of the individual intelligent detectors on the circuit. It shall be possible to automatically set the sensitivity of individual intelligent detectors during day and night periods.

5. It shall be possible for the SDC to address all intelligent devices connected to it without having to set switches at the individual devices.

6. It shall be possible to obtain a mapping report of all devices connected to the circuit for confirmation of “as-built” wiring. The map shall show physical wiring of T-Taps, device types, and the panel addresses of devices connected to the circuit. The SDC shall be capable of reporting unexpected additional device addresses and changes to the wiring in the data circuit. A specific trouble shall be reported for any off-normal non-alarm condition.

7. The SDC shall be able to report the following information on a per intelligent device basis:

a. Device Serial Number

b. Device Address

c. Device Type

d. Current Detector Sensitivity Values and the Extent of Environmental Compensation.

8. Any of 32 possible trouble codes to specifically diagnose faults.

9. Should a Signature Driver Controller CPU fail to communicate, the Signature circuit shall go into the stand alone mode. The circuit shall be capable of producing a loop alarm if an alarm type device becomes active during stand alone mode.

B. Hard Wired NAC Circuits

1. Provide where indicated on the plans supervised hard wired Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) for the control of 24Vdc EST Integrity Series Signaling Appliances. The NAC shall be Class B (Style 4), and shall control up to 3.5 amps of power to the circuit.


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 7 of 20

2. Provide where indicated on the plans supervised hard wired Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) for the control of 70.7Vrms EST Integrity Series Audio Signaling Appliances. The NAC shall be Class B (Style 4), and shall control up to 35 Watts of power to the circuit.

3. Provide where indicated on the plans supervised hard wired Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) for the control of 25Vrms EST Integrity Series Audio Signaling Appliances. The NAC shall be Class B (Style 4), and shall control up to 50 Watts of power to the circuit.

4. Panel NACs shall be power limited to 3.5A at 24Vdc and 4.1A at 20.4Vdc to support higher current demand by visible appliances at lower battery voltages.

5. Hard Wired (2-Wire) Smoke Detector Circuits.

6. Hard Wired Initiating Device Circuits

7. Provide where indicated on the plans supervised hard wired initiating device circuits. It shall be possible to configure IDCs for alarm, supervisory, or monitor operation.

2.9 COMPONENTS

A. Remote Booster Power Supplies - General

The power supply shall provide a central processor with a watchdog circuit. It shall provide 2 initiating circuits, 2 notification appliance circuits rated at 24 Vdc at 2.5A, form 'C' alarm and trouble contacts, and auxiliary power at 24Vdc at 500 mA. The power supply shall be a high efficiency switch mode type providing 4 A total to the NACs, 500 mA of auxiliary power at 24Vdc, and an automatic battery charger capable of supporting up to 10 AH of sealed lead acid batteries. Site programming shall enable or disable the local trouble buzzer, allow the following of existing signal rates or select internally generated evacuation signal rates at continuous, 20 SPM, 120 SPM, temporal 3-3-3, or California continuous or march time independent of the existing signal rate. Indicators shall be power on, system trouble, ground fault, battery trouble, and notification appliance circuit trouble. It shall be possible to activate the BPS via dry contact or by connection to an existing NAC circuit. It shall be possible to convert the BPS circuits ICs and NACs to Class 'A' operation. The base panel shall provide a communication channel and operating power for expansion modules.

1. Remote Booster Power Supply, BPS

a. The remote booster power supply shall be Edwards Systems Technology (EST) type BPS Series incorporating all control electronics, relays, and necessary modules and components in a <surface> <semi-flush> mounted cabinet. The panel shall be supervised, site programmable, modular design with expansion modules to serve connection to existing NAC circuits. All initiating, notification, and low voltage power source circuits shall be power limited.

b. The booster power supply shall be provided with battery back-up. The batteries sealed, lead-acid type and provide (60) hours of normal standby operation and five (5) minutes of normal alarm operation at the end of the standby period. The batteries shall be supervised for placement and low voltage. It shall be possible to mount the batteries remote from the panel.

c. <The Relay/City Module shall have a yellow LED and an enable/disable switch. It shall be configurable with the BPS to serve as an auxiliary relay.>

C. Intelligent Detectors


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 8 of 20

1. The System Intelligent Detectors shall be capable of full digital communications using both broadcast and polling protocol. Each detector shall be capable of performing independent fire detection algorithms. The fire detection algorithm shall measure sensor signal dimensions, time patterns and combine different fire parameters to increase reliability and distinguish real fire conditions from unwanted deceptive nuisance alarms. Signal patterns that are not typical of fires shall be eliminated by digital filters. Devices not capable of combining different fire parameters or employing digital filters shall not be acceptable.

2. Each detector shall have an integral microprocessor capable of making alarm decisions based on fire parameter information stored in the detector head. Distributed intelligence shall improve response time by decreasing the data flow between detector and analog loop controller. Detectors not capable of making independent alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. Maximum total analog loop response time for detectors changing state shall be 0.5 seconds.

3. Each detector shall have a separate means of displaying communication and alarm status. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the analog loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. Both LEDs on steady shall indicate alarm-standalone mode status. Both LEDs shall be visible through a full 360 degree viewing angle.

4. The detector shall be capable of identifying up to 32 diagnostic codes. This information shall be available for system maintenance. The diagnostic code shall be stored at the detector.

5. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings.

6. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm which identifies and sets ambient “Environmental Thresholds” approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall continually monitor the environmental impact of temperature, humidity, other contaminates as well as detector aging. The process shall employ digital compensation to adapt the detector to both 24 hour long term and 4 hour short term environmental changes. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 80% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value. Differential sensing algorithms shall maintain a constant differential between selected detector sensitivity and the “learned” base line sensitivity. The base line sensitivity information shall be updated and permanently stored at the detector approximately once every hour.

7. The intelligent analog device and the analog loop controller shall provide increased reliability and inherent survivability through intelligent analog standalone operation. The device shall automatically change to standalone conventional device operation in the event of a loop controller polling communications failure. In the analog standalone detector mode, the analog detector shall continue to operate using sensitivity and environmental compensation information stored in its microprocessor at the time of communications failure. The analog loop controller shall monitor the loop and activate a loop alarm if any detector reaches its alarm sensitivity threshold.

8. Each Signature Series device shall be capable of automatic electronic addressing and/or custom addressing without the use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP or rotary switches for addressing, either in the base or on the detector shall not be acceptable.


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 9 of 20

9. The intelligent analog detectors shall be suitable for mounting on any Signature Series detector mounting base.

10. Fixed Temperature Heat Detector, EST 284B-PL

a. Provide fixed temperature heat detectors EST 284B-PL with SIGA-CT1 single input monitor modules. The heat detector shall have a temperature heat sensor and operate at a fixed temperature. It shall continually monitor the temperature of the air in its surroundings to minimize thermal lag to the time required to process an alarm. The integral microprocessor shall determine if an alarm condition exists and initiate an alarm based on the analysis of the data. Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. The heat detector shall have a nominal alarm point rating of 194°F. The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 25 ft centers and be suitable for ceiling mount applications. Zoning as indicated on contract drawings.

11. Fixed Temperature/Rate of Rise Heat Detector, SIGA/HRS

a. Provide intelligent combination fixed temperature/rate-of-rise heat detectors < SIGA/HRS>. The heat detector shall have a low mass thermistor heat sensor and operate at a fixed temperature and at a temperature rate-of-rise. It shall continually monitor the temperature of the air in its surroundings to minimize thermal lag to the time required to process an alarm. The integral microprocessor shall determine if an alarm condition exists and initiate an alarm based on the analysis of the data. Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. The intelligent heat detector shall have a nominal fixed temperature alarm point rating of 135°F (57° C) and a rate-of-rise alarm point of 15°F (9°C) per minute. The heat detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 70 ft (21.3m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications.

12. Photoelectric Smoke Detector, SIGA-PS


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 10 of 20

a. Provide intelligent photoelectric smoke detectors < SIGA-PS>. The analog photoelectric detector shall utilize a light scattering type photoelectric smoke sensor to sense changes in air samples from its surroundings. The integral microprocessor shall dynamically examine values from the sensor and initiate an alarm based on the analysis of data. Systems using central intelligence for alarm decisions shall not be acceptable. The detector shall continually monitor any changes in sensitivity due to the environmental affects of dirt, smoke, temperature, aging and humidity. The information shall be stored in the integral processor and transferred to the analog loop controller for retrieval using a laptop <or the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool>. The photo detector shall be rated for ceiling installation at a minimum of 30 ft (9.1m) centers and be suitable for wall mount applications. The photoelectric smoke detector shall be suitable for direct insertion into air ducts up to 3 ft (0.91m) high and 3 ft (0.91m) wide with air velocities up to 5,000 ft/min. (0-25.39m/sec) without requiring specific air duct detector housings or supply tubes.

b. The percent smoke obscuration per foot alarm set point shall be field selectable to any of five sensitivity settings ranging from 1.0% to 3.5%. The photo detector shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:

1. Temperature: 3232oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)

2. Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing

3. Elevation: no limit

13. Standard Detector Mounting Bases, SIGA-SB / SIGA-SB4

a. Provide standard detector mounting bases <SIGA-SB> <SIGA-SB4> suitable for mounting on <North American 1-gang, 3½” or 4” octagon box and 4” square box> <European BESA or 1-gang>. The base shall, contain no electronics, support all Signature Series detector types and have the following minimum requirements:

1. Removal of the respective detector shall not affect communications with other detectors.

2. Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the base. Bases which must be removed to gain access to the terminals shall not be acceptable.

3. The base shall be capable of supporting one (1) Signature Series <SIGA-LED> Remote Alarm LED Indicator. Provide remote LED alarm indicators where shown on the plans.

14. Relay Detector Mounting Bases, SIGA-RB / SIGA-RB4

a. Provide relay detector mounting bases <SIGA-RB> <SIGA-RB4> suitable for mounting on <North American 1-gang, 3 ½ “ or 4” octagon box and 4” square box> <European BESA or 1-gang>. The relay base shall support all Signature Series detector types and have the following minimum requirements:

1. The relay shall be a bi-stable type and selectable for normally open or normally closed operation.

2. The position of the contact shall be supervised.


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 11 of 20

3. The relay operation shall be exercised by the detector processor upon power up.

4. The relay shall automatically de-energize when a detector is removed.

5. The operation of the relay base shall be controlled by its respective detector processor. Detectors operating standalone mode shall operate the relay upon changing to alarm state. Relay bases not controlled by the detector microprocessor shall not be acceptable.

6. Form “C” Relay contacts shall have a minimum rating of 1 amp @ 30 Vdc and be listed for “pilot duty”.

7. Removal of the respective detector shall not affect communications with other detectors.

8. Terminal connections shall be made on the room side of the base. Bases which must be removed to gain access to the terminals shall not be acceptable.

15. Duct Detector Housing, SIGA-DH

a. Provide smoke detector duct housing assemblies <SIGA-DH> to facilitate mounting an intelligent analog Photoelectric Detector <SIGA-PS>, along with a standard, relay or isolator detector mounting base. Provide for variations in duct air velocity between 300 and 4000 feet per minute (300 to 1000 feet per minute for ion-photo-heat detector). Protect the measuring chamber from damage and insects. Provide an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube which extends into the duct air stream up to ten feet. Provide drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and mounting the housing. Provide five one gang knockouts for mounting optional Signature Series modules. Finish the housing in baked red enamel.

D. Intelligent Modules

1. It shall be possible to address each Intelligent Signature Series module without the

use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be acceptable. The personality of multifunction modules shall be programmable at site to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop Controller. Modules requiring EPROM, PROM, ROM changes or DIP switch and/or jumper changes shall not be acceptable. The modules shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input and output circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults. The module shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:

a. Temperature: 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)

b. Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing

2. Single Input Module, SIGA-CTI

a. Provide intelligent single input modules <SIGA-CT1>. The Single Input Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B input circuit capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 12 of 20

shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers. The single input module shall support the following circuit types:

1. Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.)

2. Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Waterflow Switches)

3. Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.)

4. Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches)

3. Dual Input Module, SIGA-CT2

a. Provide intelligent dual input modules <SIGA-CT2>. The Dual Input Module shall provide two (2) supervised Class B input circuits each capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers. The dual input module shall support the following circuit types:

1. Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.)

2. Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Waterflow Switches)

3. Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.)

4. Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches)

4. Monitor Module, SIGA-MM1

a. Provide intelligent monitor modules <SIGA-MM1>. The Monitor Module shall be factory set to support one (1) supervised Class B Normally-Open Active Non-Latching Monitor circuit. The monitor module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers.

5. Waterflow/Tamper Module, SIGA-WTM

a. Provide intelligent waterflow/tamper modules <SIGA-WTM>. The Waterflow/Tamper Module shall be factory set to support two (2) supervised Class B input circuits. Channel A shall support a Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching Waterflow Switch circuit. Channel B shall support a Normally-Open Active Latching Tamper Switch. The waterflow/tamper module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers.

6. Single Input Signal Module, SIGA-CC1

a. Provide intelligent single input signal modules <SIGA-CC1>. The Single Input (Single Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B output circuit capable of a minimum of 2 personalities, each with a distinct operation. When selected as a telephone power selector, the module shall be capable of generating its own “ring tone”. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 2-gang covers, or


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 13 of 20

European 100mm square boxes. The single input signal module shall support the following operations:

1. Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A, 25Vrms @50w or 70 Vrms @ 35 Watts of Audio)

2. Telephone Power Selector with Ring Tone (Fire Fighter’s Telephone)

7. Dual Input Signal Module, SIGA-CC2

a. Provide intelligent dual input signal modules <SIGA-CC2>. The Dual Input (Dual Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide a means to selectively connect one of two (2) signaling circuit power risers to one (1) supervised output circuit. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100mm square boxes. The dual input signal module shall support the following operation:

1. Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A, 25 Vrms @ 50w or 70 Vrms @ 35w of Audio)

8. Control Relay Module, SIGA-CR

a. Provide intelligent control relay modules <SIGA-CR>. The Control Relay Module shall provide one form “C” dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware. The control relay module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers.

9. Universal Class A/B Module, SIGA-UM

a. Provide intelligent class A/B modules <SIGA-UM>. The Universal Class A/B Module shall be capable of a minimum of fifteen (15) distinct operations. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100mm square boxes. The universal class A/B module shall support the following circuit types:

1. Two (2) supervised Class B Normally-Open Alarm Latching.

2. Two (2) supervised Class B Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching.

3. Two (2) supervised Class B Normally-Open Active Non-Latching.

4. Two (2) supervised Class B Normally-Open Active Latching.

5. One (1) form “C” dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc.

6. One (1) supervised Class A Normally-Open Alarm Latching.

7. One (1) supervised Class A Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching.

8. One (1) supervised Class A Normally-Open Active Non-Latching.

9. One (1) supervised Class A Normally-Open Active Latching.

10. One (1) supervised Class A 2-wire Smoke Alarm Non-Verified.


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 14 of 20

11. One (1) supervised Class B 2-wire Smoke Alarm Non-Verified.

12. One (1) supervised Class A 2-wire Smoke Alarm Verified

13. One (1) supervised Class B 2-wire Smoke Alarm Verified

14. One (1) supervised Class A Signal Circuit, 24Vdc @ 2A.

15. One (1) supervised Class B Signal Circuit, 24Vdc @ 2A.

10. Isolator Module, SIGA-IM

a. Provide intelligent fault isolators modules <SIGA-IM>. The Isolator Module shall be capable of isolating and removing a fault from a class A data circuit while allowing the remaining data loop to continue operating. The module shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2 ½” (64mm) deep 2-gang boxes and 1 ½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 2-gang covers, or European 100mm square boxes.

E. Intelligent Manual Pull Stations

1. It shall be possible to address each Signature Series fire alarm pull station without the use of DIP or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be acceptable. The manual stations shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs mounted on their integral, factory assembled single or two stage input module. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The station shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults. The fire alarm pull station shall be suitable for operation in the following environment:

a. Temperature: 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)

b. Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing

2. Single Action Manual Pull Stations, SIGA-270

a. Provide intelligent single action, single stage fire alarm stations <SIGA-270>. The fire alarm station shall be of lexan construction with an internal toggle switch. Provide a key locked test feature. Finish the station in red with white “PULL IN CASE OF FIRE” lettering. The manual station shall be suitable for mounting on North American 2½” (64mm) deep 1-gang boxes and 1½” (38mm) deep 4” square boxes with 1-gang covers.

F. Heat Detectors

1. Combination Fixed Temperature/Rate-of-Rise Heat Detectors, 281B, 282B

a. Provide low profile heat detectors rated for a maximum smooth ceiling rating of 2500 sq. ft. The detector shall be finished pure white and have a positive identification for the operation of the fixed temperature element. The detectors shall be rated at 15oF (9oC) per minute rate-of-rise and 135oF (57oC) fixed temperature. 15oF (9oC) per minute rate-of-rise and 194oF (90oC) fixed temperature.

2. Fixed Temperature Heat Detectors, EST 284B-PL

a. Provide low profile heat detectors rated for a maximum smooth ceiling rating of 625 sq. ft. The detector shall have a positive identification for the operation of the fixed temperature element. The detectors shall be rated at 194oF fixed temperature.


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 15 of 20

G. Notification Appliances

1. All appliances shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective Service.

2. All strobe appliances or combination appliances with strobes shall be capable of providing the “Equivalent Facilitation” which is allowed under the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibilities Guidelines (ADA(AG)), and shall be UL 1971, and ULC S526 Listed.

3. All appliances shall be of the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control Panel specified to insure absolute compatibility between the appliances and the control panels, and to insure that the application of the appliances are done in accordance with the single manufacturers’ instructions.

4. Any appliances which do not meet the above requirements, and are submitted for use must show written proof of their compatibility for the purposes intended. Such proof shall be in the form of documentation from all manufacturers which clearly states that their equipment (as submitted) are 100% compatible with each other for the purposes intended.

H. Self-Synchronized Strobes

1. GENESIS 1-Gang Strobes, GIR-VMSeries

a. Provide strobes manufactured by EST, Cat No. GIR-VM. In – Out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. The strobes shall have a <red> <white> plastic face plate. They shall provide <15 cd> <30 cd> <75 cd> <110 cd> synchronized flash outputs. Strobes shall mount in a North American 1-gang box.

I. Speaker/strobes

1. Provide electronic horn/strobes manufactured by EST, Cat. No. G4-S2VM In – Out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. The SPEAKER/STROBE shall have a <red> <white> pleastic housing. Speaker strobe shall be selectable for ¼, ½, 1 and 2 watt operation. Pattern sound output level of 90 dBA average shall be provided.

2. The strobe shall provide <15 cd> <75 cd> <30 cd> <110 cd> synchronized flash outputs. The strobe shall have lens markings oriented for <wall> <ceiling> mounting Horn/strobe shall mount to a NorthAmerican 4” electrical box (2-18” deep) using the 2 screws provided with box or to a 20-gang (2-3/4” deep) electric box.

J. Ancillary Devices - general

1. Ancillary devices submitted for use must have written proof of their compatibility for the purposes intended. Such proof shall be in the form of documentation from all manufacturers that clearly states that their equipment (as submitted) is 100% compatible with each other for the purposes intended.

K. Remote relays

1. Multi-Voltage Control Relays, MR-100 Series

a. Provide remote control relays connected to supervised ancillary circuits for control of fans, dampers, door releases, etc. Replay contact ratings shall be SPDT and rated for 10 amperes at 115 Vac. A single relay may be energized from a voltage source of 24 Vdc, 24 VAC, 115 VAC, or 230 VAC. A red LED shall indicate the relay is energized. <A metal enclosure shall be provided.>

L. Sounder Bases


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 16 of 20

1. Sounder base is a mounted base, which requires separate power connection. Sounder turns on when devices (detector) is in alarm and sound a local alarm. When the detector alarms, it commands the sounder to activate. Sound output has a minimum 85 dbA measured in UL reverberant room. Upon alarm of respective sounder base, a local signal shall transmit at the panel monitoring location.

M. Vandalism/Damage Stoppers

1. Pull Station Vandalism/Damage Stopper

a. Pull station protective guard shall be STI-1230 Stopper II without horn.

N. REMOTE CALL STATIONS

1. The remote call station shall contain an amber “call-placed” indicator and a red acknowledge indicator, a 3.5” 45ohm speaker and a cancel button on an extruded aluminum panel.

2. Screw terminals for the remote call station shall be provided for wiring connections.

3. Remote call stations shall be mounted a maximum of 48” above finished floor.

4. The remote call station shall be a compatible with ccsu’s fire alarm system.

5. The operation instructions (as indicated below) shall be sealed in plastic and mounted adjacent to each remote call station.

FOR EMERGENCY ONLY

Area of Rescue Assistance

Operating Instructions

1. Push the Call Button for help.

2. Observe the Amber call-placed light and remain

in this designated area.

3. Observe the Red acknowledge light and listen

for instructions.

4. Answer voice communication (hands-free)

O. POWER SUPPLY / CONTROL UNIT

1. The master station power supply / control unit shall shall be a compatible with ccsu’s fire alarm system.


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 17 of 20

2. The power supply/control unit shall be a compatible with ccsu’s fire alarm system and be assembled with the above-described components.

3. Indicator lamps shall have removable lenses for lamp replacement and to protect lamp identification markings.

4. Construction shall be of extruded aluminum with a metal flush mount housing and trim frame.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The entire system shall be installed in a workmanlike manner in accordance with approved

manufacturers manuals and wiring diagrams. The contractor shall furnish all conduit. wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, cabinets and similar devices necessary for the complete installation. All wiring shall be of the type recommended by the NEC, approved by local authorities having jurisdiction for the purpose, and shall be installed in dedicated conduit throughout.

B. All penetration of floor slabs and fire walls shall be fire stopped in accordance with all local fire codes.

C. End of Line Resistors shall be furnished as required for mounting as directed by the manufacturer.

D. All wiring shall be installed according to NEC standards per the drawings submitted by the authorized Engineered Systems Distributor, unless otherwise noted.


A. The system shall be installed and fully tested under the supervision of trained manufacturer's representative. The system shall be demonstrated to perform all the functions as specified.

PART 4 - MANUFACTURERS

4.1 Bids shall be based on the proprietary Edwards EST equipment to match and integrate into the existing system. No other systems or manufacturer will be acceptable in the contractor's bid.

PART 5 - MAINTENANCE

5.1 The Contractor shall provide for two preventive maintenance visits per year, emergency service response for equipment or component failures. Testing shall be performed in accordance with NFPA 72H. The maintenance contract shall begin at the end of the warranty period.

5.2 The Contractor shall note this section specifies the proprietary Edwards EST Addressable System as provided by an EST approved vendor. Due to the fact that the work specified in this section modifies and extend an existing campus wide system and that these modifications will impact that system, all system programming and system connections shall be done by the Agency approved fire alarm contractor


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 18 of 20

PART 6 - TESTING

6.1 TESTING

A. The entire Fire Alarm System shall be tested by an approved UUJS Service company which shall issue a U.L. Certificate for the correctness of the installation, maintenance of required system documentation, periodic system testing and system repair and maintenance for specified system.

B. Provide Service Company legal, valid copy of Certificate with submittals.

C. Prior to final acceptance of the system manufacturer of system with Contractor shall, in the presence of contractor, owner's Representative, Architect's/Engineer's Representative, Construction Specialist, Department of Public Works and the State Fire Marshal, test the system as required by N.F.P.A., Article 72H.

D. Final approval of the completed system and the testing shall be by the authority having jurisdiction.

E. The Vendor shall leave the Fire Alarm System installed under this Project, complete and operable in every respect. Any and all monies allowed but not expended, shall be refunded to the State, in their entirety.

F. Scope: The scope of the work required to satisfy the intent of the work stated above includes, but shall not be limited to the following:

1. The assignment of addresses to all devices, data loop, signal devices and other functions, using the Contractors approve Bill of Materials to obtain the approval of the Engineer and the Agency.

2. Provide, subsequent to the approvals of the drawings and the installation of equipment, all required programming of local building and police station loop panels.

a. Color Graphics: Submit all programs, floor plans, DXF/dwg., files, etc. for the approval of the Engineer and the Agency's Architect. Subsequent to approval, install approved program(s) in the Color Graphic Touch Screen at Campus police station. Test all devices through the TV color graphics in accordance with the test specified above.

3. Provide technical, Job Site assistance during the construction process and for all final connections.

4. Provide the initial testing of each device at the local panel and the head end panel, located at the Police Station, for function, program correctness and loop integrity. Coordinate the above with the Electrical Contractor.

5. Provide all final connections to the Campus Police Central Panel.

6. Provide all final testing of the system in the presence of the Electrical Contractor, the Agency's Architect and the Fire Marshall.

7. Provide NFPA 72 certificate signed by the Vendor. provide UL certification for the system prior to its incorporation into the Project, (4403-621).

8. Provide a one year system warranty, in accordance with the requirements specified herein and two maintenance visits. The equipment warranty shall be provided by TPC.

9. Assist the Contractor in his preparation of as built system drawings.

10. Provide all miscellaneous devices, appurtenances and other similar items incidental to, or required for, a complete and operable installation.


SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 19 of 20

11. Coordinate the work of all the trades required to fulfill the intent of this Allowance stated above.



SECTION 16721


APRIL 18, 2016; Page 20 of 20


DIVISION 16 SECTION 16990

TELECOM

COPERNICUS HALL RENOVATIONS TO DIGITAL PRINTING & GRAPHICS TECHNOLOGY LAB CCSU PROJECT # 23-118

APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 1 of 32

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and/or suppliers providing goods and services referenced in or related to this Section will also be bound by the Related Documents identified in Division 01 Section “Summary”.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, each and every Contractor, Subcontractor and/or supplier providing goods or services referenced in or related to this Division will also be bound by the Documents identified in General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Project Specifications and Drawings for requirements that affect this SECTION whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this SECTION.

C. Drawings and Specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. Quantities of technology outlets, typical installation details, cable routing and outlet types will be provided as an attachment to this document. If the bid documents are in conflict, this specification will take precedence. The successful vendor will meet or exceed all requirements for the cable system described in this document.

D. Provide work specified and not shown, and work shown and not specified as though explicitly required by both. Although if work is not specifically shown or specified, provide supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, devices and materials obviously necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Comply with below qualification requirements.

B. The Installer (Firm and Employees) will be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. Demonstrate at least five years of continuous recent experience on similar projects. The Installer will hold recent, up-to-date licenses, certifications and training certificates in the area the project is located and for the equipment to be installed.

C. Provide names of contacts from the last five similar projects including the General Contractor, Owner's Representative, Architect and Engineer. Indicate project locations, scope and current phone numbers that the contacts can be reached at.

D. Qualified Structured Cabling System Installation firms will have demonstrable design and installation training with certifications of competence. Certified training will be industry recognized and at least equal to:

1. Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc. (BISCI) Registered Installer. 2. Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD). 3. Certified Installer for Solution provided.

E. Provide a full time on site foreman who personally has been certified as described above. Submit all documentation under this Section.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 2 of 32

F. Provide an on-call Project Manager to supervise the project.

G. Each Foreman and Installer working on this project will be trained to the qualified level as specified by the Manufacturer(s) for installation and maintenance of equipment being provided on this project. The training will consist of at least a minimum of proper installation techniques of their specific equipment in order to have a complete operating system meeting or exceeding the requirements as specified herein. Each Foreman and Installer working on this project will have documentation from the Manufacturer indicating that they have been adequately trained prior to the start of the project. Only Foreman and Installers who have been properly trained and documented by the Manufacturer whose equipment is being provided on this project will be allowed to install same.

H. Separate Qualifications Requirements:

1. Installers will be specifically qualified for each system being installed under this section. Provide documentation for each installer including:

a. State of Connecticut License b. Registered Telecommunications Installer Apprentice Certificate

I. Maintain at the site an updated copy of the Manufacturer Trained Installers list including a copy of their training documentation from the Manufacturer. This documentation will be made available to the Architect upon request.


A. The work under this Section includes providing of all material, labor, equipment and supplies and the performance of all operations to provide a complete working and fully functional telecom/data required by the Drawings and details and as specified herein. Where the Drawings, Specifications, Codes, Regulations, Laws, or the requirements of the local Authority conflict, provide the higher quality and higher quantity indicated or required and follow the strictest requirement. In general, the work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

B. Furnish and install a complete data, voice cabling system infrastructure.

C. Furnish and install all required relay brackets, cabinets and/or racks as required and as indicated.

D. Furnish, install, and terminate all UTP Systems including:

1. Horizontal Cabling. 2. Cable Management. 3. Work Area Outlets. 4. Modular Jacks. 5. Patch Panels. 6. Patch and Equipment Cords. 7. Cross Connect Blocks. 8. Cross Connect Cabling. 9. Connectors and Couplings.

E. Furnish any and all material required to form a fully functional cabling system.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 3 of 32

F. Furnish, install and make fully functional overhead projectors and local sound systems in locations indicated on drawings.

G. Cable segments and links will be tested from both ends of the cable for each of the construction phases. (Verify that cable labeling matches at both ends).

H. Furnish test results of all cabling to the owner on disk and paper format, listed by each Equipment/Telecommunication Room, then by workstation ID.

I. Provide owner training and documentation. (Testing documentation and As-built drawings)

J. Pathways and Supports – (Coordination per Division 26 specifications) if applicable.

K. Pathways and Supports – (Provide Specific Pathways and Supports that are Not Being Provided per Division 26 specifications, i.e., J-hooks, etc.).

L. Structured Cable Pathway (Within Technology Spaces and Integral to Structured Cabling System Equipment Racks and Layouts/Support) if applicable see drawings.

M. Power Requirements - (Coordination per Division 26 specifications).

N. UL 497 primary and UL 497A secondary line lightning and surge protection at entrance to the building from the exterior.

O. Protection of new and existing work.

P. Record Drawings and Documentation.

Q. Staging.

R. Telecommunications Equipment Grounding/Bonding to Telecommunications Grounding Backbone System.

S. Telephone System Cabling.

T. Seismic Supports, Supplementary Steel and Channels.

U. Operation and Maintenance Instructions and Manuals for this Section's work.

V. Nameplates, Labels and Tags.

W. Testing and certification.

X. Sealing of Penetrations and Openings.

Y. Phasing of work and maintenance of service to existing and temporarily relocated items, owner equipment, etc. as required meeting the project schedule, including premium time.

Z. Coordination with Manufacturers, other trades, General Contractor and Owner. Include costs associated with adjustments and changes resulting from coordination.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 4 of 32

AA. Costs associated with core drilling and cutting and patching using appropriate and trained tradesmen approved by the General Contractor and the Architect.

BB. The Contractor will be responsible for testing and verification that the entire building structure is free from EMI/RFI interference factors prior to installation of unshielded twisted pair station cabling. Tests will be given to Owner's Representatives prior to start of cable purchasing.

CC. Coordinate to ensure the General Contractor indicates on the project schedule:

1. Installer, Architect and Owner coordination meetings: 3 months (90 days) prior to scheduled Substantial Completion date or as soon as Submittals are submitted and reviewed for projects with schedules shorter than 5 months (150 days).

2. Systems Testing: 30-45 days prior to project completion and prior to Substantial Completion, Acceptance Demonstrations and Training.

3. Acceptance Demonstrations: 15 days prior to project Substantial Completion and prior to Owner acceptance of project.

4. Systems Training (if Applicable): 15 days prior to final Substantial Completion and prior to the Owner's acceptance of project.

1.5 REGULATORY REFERENCES

A. All work and materials will conform in every detail to the rules and requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, the local Electrical Code and present manufacturing standards.

B. All materials will be UL Listed and will be marked as such. If UL has no published standards for a particular item, then other national independent testing standards will apply and such items will bear those labels. Where UL has an applicable system listing and label, the entire system will be so labeled.

C. All materials will be ETL Verified (not just tested) to be Category 6 component and channel compliant.

D. The cabling system described in this is derived from the recommendations made in recognized telecommunications industry standards. The Contractor will comply and reference the latest editions of the following standards including any related addendum or TSB’s not listed below:

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.2-1-2000, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components, Addendum 1 – Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 Category 6 Cabling

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA - 568-B.3, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components

5. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 569-A, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

6. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 570-A, Residential Telecommunications Cabling Standard 7. ANSI/TIA/EIA – 606-A, Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructure of

Commercial Buildings 8. ANSI – J-STD-607-A-2002, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements

for Telecommunications 9. ANSI/ TIA/EIA – 758, Customer-Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling

Standard


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 5 of 32

10. BICSI - TDMM, Building Industries Consulting Services International, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) – 11th Edition

11. BICSI – Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Manual 3rd Edition 12. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA – 70), National Electrical Code (NEC)

E. If any of the above documents are in conflict, then the more stringent requirement will apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation.

F. This document does not replace any code, either partially or wholly. The Contractor must be aware of local codes that may impact this project.

.

1.6 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS

A. All work indicated on the Drawings is intended to be approximately correct to scale, but figures dimensions and detailed Drawings are to be followed in every case. The Drawings are diagrammatic. Size of raceways, cable pathways and methods of running them are indicated, but it is not intended to show every offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that may be encountered.

B. Schematic diagrams shown on the Drawings indicate the required functions. Standard diagrams of the Manufacturer may be used for the functions indicated without exact adherence to the Schematic Drawings shown. Work required for such deviations will be provided.

C. Where Drawings or Specifications conflict or are unclear, advice the Architect/Engineer, in writing, before Award of Contract. Otherwise, interpretations of Contract Documents by the Architect/Engineer will be final, and no additional compensation will be permitted due to discrepancies or inconsistencies, resolved according to the Architect/Engineer's interpretation.

D. Items referred to in singular number in Contract Drawings will be provided in quantities necessary to complete work.

E. The right is reserved to make reasonable changes in locations of work prior to rough-in at no additional cost.

F. Drawings do not limit responsibility of determining full extent of work required by Contract Documents. Refer to all Drawings and Specifications that indicate types of construction in which work will be installed and work of other trades with which work of this Section must be coordinated.

G. Where Drawings or Specifications do not coincide with Manufacturer’s recommendations, or with applicable Codes and Standards, alert the Architect in writing before installation. Otherwise, make changes in installed work as the Architect requires without additional cost.

H. In situations or where potential conflicts exist or where the Installer believes guidance is required, submit a sketch identifying proposed solution and the Architect will review, note if necessary, and return this sketch appropriately marked for use by the Installer.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 6 of 32

1.7 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. The work will be so performed that the progress of the entire building construction, including all other trades, will not be delayed and not interfered with. Materials and apparatus will be installed as fast as conditions of the building will permit and must be installed promptly when and as directed.

B. Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings required for all apparatus and give information in advance to build openings into the work. Furnish and set in place all sleeves, pockets, supports and incidentals.

C. Coordinate exact locations and roughing in dimensions of all work before installation and make all final connections as required. Any changes required to avoid interferences or to provide adequate clearances for Code and maintenance requirements will be made at no additional costs.

D. Structural elements of the project will not be relocated, altered or changed to accommodate the work without written authorization from the Architect.

E. Work that is installed before coordination with other trades or that causes interference with the work of other trades will be changed to correct condition at no additional cost.

F. Obtain a complete set of Project Drawings and Specifications for coordination and to determine the full scope of work.

G. Attend project coordination meetings to coordinate work of this Section, pathways, work of other trades phasing and other project requirements.

1.8 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Submit complete shop drawings, data and samples in accordance with SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS

B. Under the provisions of this request for proposal, prior to the start of work the Structured Cabling System Contractor will:

1. Submit copies of the certification of the company and names of staff that will be performing the installation and termination of the installation to provide proof of compliance of this spec.

2. Submit proof from Manufacturer of Contractor’s good standing in Manufacturer’s program.

3. Submit appropriate cut sheets and samples for all products, hardware and cabling.

C. Work will not proceed without the Owner's approval of the submitted items.

D. The Structured Cabling Systems Contractor will receive approval from the Owners on all substitutions of material. No substituted materials will be installed except by written approval from the Owner.

1.9 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Purchase and maintain at the job site a complete and separate black line set of prints of the approved Working Drawings which accurately indicate daily progress by coloring materials and


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 7 of 32

apparatus as installed. Schedules will be modified to reflect data consistent with that of the installed equipment. Clearly show all changes to the work as a result of addenda, change orders, clarifications, instructions issued by the Architect or conditions encountered in the field. Accurately indicate the location, size, type and elevation of new work and their relationship to existing work. Provide dimensions from permanent site improvements or column centerlines.

B. The marked up and colored in prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the work installed. They will be inspected weekly and will be corrected immediately if found inaccurate or incomplete. Requisitions for payment will not be approved until the Drawings are accurate and up-to-date.

C. At the completion of the work submit one set of the marked up prints for review and acceptance. After acceptance, these marked up prints will be used in the preparation of the CADD Record Drawings “as-built”. Record Drawings will consist of all Contract Drawings of this Section.

D. Structured Cabling System Record Documents:

1. Provide "as-built" structured cabling system records with at least the minimum information including "required linkages", "other linkages" and "user codes" required by TIA/EIA 606 for the following:

a. Pathway Records b. Termination Hardware Records c. Space Records d. Termination Position Records e. Cable Records f. Grounding Records

E. Make all modifications on the CADD Drawing files indicated on the marked up set of Record Drawings. Remove all superseded data to show the completed installation.

F. Deliver the completed Record Documents properly titled and dated to the Architect. These Record Documents will become the property of the Owner.

1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY

A. Be responsible for the care and protection of all work included under this Section until it has been tested and accepted.

B. Protect all equipment and materials from damage from all causes including theft. All materials and equipment damaged or stolen will be replaced with equal material or equipment at the option of the Architect and Owner.

C. Materials and equipment stored for this project will be protected and maintained according to the Manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements and according to the applicable requirements of NFPA 70B.

D. Protect all equipment, outlets and openings with temporary plugs, caps and covers. Protect work and materials of other trades from damage that might be caused by work or workmen and make good any damage caused.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 8 of 32

E. Use caution to avoid damage to existing work, and to prevent harm to personnel working in all areas.

F. Observe all safety precautions and requirements for the construction.

G. The General Contractor and the Installer are responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and requirements during construction.

H. Coordinate installations with all other trades in order to not damage equipment or cables during construction. Any work that is damaged during construction will not be repaired. Replace damaged work completely, with no splices in cabling, at no additional cost to the Project.

1.11 USE OF THE SITE

A. Use of the site will be at the owner’s discretion in matters that the owner deems it necessary to place restrictions. The Owner I.T. Department reserves the right to place restrictions in areas that affect operational facilities and service.

1.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT STANDARDS

A. Where materials or equipment are specified by patent proprietary name or name of the Manufacturer, such specification is used for the purpose of establishing a standard for that particular item. If more than one Manufacturer is listed the Contract Documents are based on the first Manufacturer listed, and all other Manufacturers are considered a substitution.

B. If three or more Manufacturers are indicated without the term "or equal", or "or approved equal", then the material and equipment will be supplied by one of those indicated and that material and equipment will conform in all respects to the Drawings and Specifications.

C. No equipment or material will be used, furnished or installed unless previously reviewed and accepted by the Architect.

D. Substitutions may be offered for review provided the material, equipment or process offered for consideration is equal in every respect to that indicated or specified. The request for each substitution must be accompanied by a letter from an Authorized Representative of the Manufacturer and the Installer indicating that the substitution meets or exceeds all specified requirements. Provide complete specifications, drawings or samples to properly appraise the materials, equipment or process. Acceptance of substitutions will be based on performance, appearance, use, maintenance requirements, durability, aesthetics, physical arrangement, size and quality.

E. If a substitution of materials or equipment, in whole or in part, is made, the installer under this section will bear the cost of any changes, engineering or construction, necessitated as a result of said substitution.

F. Materials will be new, unused, of recent manufacture, not previously installed, full weight, standard, and the best quality of its kind and acceptable to the Architect.

G. Provide NRTL listed or labeled products whenever there are NRTL standards, listings or labeling available for that product category.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 9 of 32

H. The Specifications or notes and description following a catalog number is basically to identify the item, but may also call for accessories, options or modifications which are not indicated in the catalog number.

I. Reviewed submittals on substitute equipment will only allow the Installer to proceed with installation. The substitution will not be considered equal until such time as the Architect and Owner's Representative have completely accepted the installation. All costs for removal, relocation, or replacement of said Substitution will be at the risk of the Installer.

J. Provide products of one Manufacturer for each classification of equipment.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturers will provide replacement warranties for material and equipment furnished under this Section. Such warranties will be in addition to and not in lieu of all liabilities which the Manufacturer and the Installer may have by law or by provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. All materials, equipment and work furnished or installed under this Section will be warranted against all defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 18 months commencing with the date of Substantial Completion. Any failure due to defective material, equipment, installation or workmanship which may develop will be corrected at no expense to the Owner including all materials, labor, travel, expenses, system diagnostics and damage to areas, materials and other systems resulting from such failures.

C. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the systems during the warranty period, the affected parts will be replaced. Any equipment requiring excessive service consisting of more than two unscheduled service calls, will be considered defective and will be replaced.

D. Where warranties, maintenance contracts, or training are required beyond a period of one year, provide written proof from the Manufacturer for the time period indicated as acceptable to the Architect and provide a performance bond payable to the Owner covering the required work for the time period. Written proof and bonds will be submitted prior to payment for Substantial Completion.

E. Include copies of all warranties, maintenance contracts, training contracts and performance bonds in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

F. Provide certified factory trained technical service personnel for service and maintenance of the system.

G. Provide a copy of this warranty section in the Operations and Maintenance Manuals. Each copy will be dated, signed and certified by an authorized Representative of the Installer providing work under this Section stating that these requirements are understood and will be complied with without exception.

H. Provide extended warranty as indicated in this specification.

1.14 EXTENDED WARRANTY/GUARANTEE – UTP AND FIBER OPTIC CABLING SYSTEMS

A. Provide a 20 year Manufacturer’s warranty/guarantee. This warranty/guarantee will include all labor and material and will be provided by a factory certified installer for the products being installed under this Section.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 10 of 32

B. Provide Manufacturer’s assurance that all warranty conditions are met and that the installation qualifies for all applicable 20 year warranty programs.

1.15 CONTINUITY OF SERVICE AND SCHEDULING OF WORK

A. Continuity of all services will be maintained in all areas that will be occupied or temporarily relocated during the construction period. If an interruption of service becomes necessary, such will be scheduled in advance, made only upon consent of the Owner and at a time outside normal working hours as the Owner will designate. The Contractor will schedule the shutdown with seven days in advance. Arrange work to minimize shutdown time.

B. Should services be inadvertently interrupted, immediately notify the Owner. Be prepared to immediately furnish labor, materials and the equipment necessary for prompt restoration of interrupted service.

C. Refer to the overall scheduling of the work of the project. Schedule work, process Submittals and order materials and equipment to neither conform to this schedule and install work to not delay nor interfere with the progress of the project.

D. Inform General Contractor and Architect immediately of any delays or potential delays. Furnish Manufacturer’s letter to verify order date, equipment delays, expected shipment date, order number, and potential remedies to speed up delivery. Any costs to speed up delivery will be implemented at no cost to the project if the equipment or material was not ordered as soon as possible after Contract award or within the time frames indicated with the Submittals.

E. Include premium time required to comply with the project scheduling and phasing.

F. Be aware of, and plan for, project scheduling and phasing. Provide for complete continuous operation of all systems. Coordinate scheduling and phasing with the Architect, Owner, other Trades, and the General Contractor.

G. Demolition of existing systems being updated will take place only after the new or replacement system is completely installed, operational, tested and certified. This work may be required on a "per-phase" basis.

1.16 CERTIFICATES OF APPROVAL

A. Upon completion of all work, and as a condition to receiving payment at Substantial Completion, furnish to the Architect the following original signed certificates and include copies of these certificates as part of the Operation and Maintenance manuals:

1. Certification from the Manufacturers authorized representative stating that authorized factory engineers have inspected and tested the operation of their respective equipment and found same to be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements, all requirements for Manufacturer’s warranties are complied with, and equipment is in satisfactory operating condition. This certification will be provided for each piece of major equipment and cabling and for all complete systems. Provide certificate for additional items requested by the Architect.

2. Certificates of inspection, letters or notices from the appropriate governmental authorized inspectional authorities stating that all portions of the work (indicate trade and responsibility) have been inspected and are installed in conformance with the applicable codes, laws, ordinances and referenced standards. If non-conformance notices are received, include the re-inspection certificate, letter of explanation, etc. as required to


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 11 of 32

indicate complete conformance. Provide written evidence of all exceptions or variances given by any Inspector.

3. Certificate from the installing firm responsible for the work (indicate trade and responsibility) signed by an authorized Officer of the firm and the Foreman or Project Manager in charge, indicating trade license numbers and stating that to the best of the signer's knowledge and belief that the project (indicate project name and address) has been installed in compliance with the Contract Drawings, Specifications and Addenda, and all applicable codes, laws, ordinances and referenced standards. Where sub-contractors perform a portion of the work of this section include certificates from them.

B. Final affidavit for the occupancy permit will not be signed until the above certificates have been submitted and accepted.

1.17 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. When Work under this Section, or a designated portion of Work, is substantially complete, submit written notice through the General Contractor with a list of items remaining to be completed or corrected.

B. Should Architect observe and find Work is not substantially complete, promptly notify the General Contractor, in writing, listing observed deficiencies.

C. Remedy all deficiencies and submit a second written notice of Substantial Completion.

D. Substantial Completion will not be considered unless work remaining is less than one percent of the Contract Value of this Section and all systems are operational and tested to verify compliance with Contract Documents. Only minor items will remain to be completed.

E. Record Drawings, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Acceptance Demonstrations, Owner personnel training, spare parts or extra materials required, test reports, warranties, performance bond for extended warranties and maintenance contracts and training, and certifications of installation inspections will be submitted and accepted prior to Substantial Completion.

F. When Architect finds Work is substantially complete a Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents will be prepared.

1.18 FINAL COMPLETION

A. When Work under this Section is complete, submit through the General Contractor written certification that:

1. Contract Documents (which include addenda, clarifications, RFI's, change orders and instructions from the Architect) have been reviewed.

2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and deficiencies

listed with Certificate of Substantial Completion have been corrected. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully

operational. 5. Work is complete and ready for Architect's final review.

B. Should Architect observe and find Work incomplete, the review will be promptly suspended and the General Contractor notified in writing.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 12 of 32

C. Complete work, remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of Final Completion.

D. Architect will, upon receipt of a second certification of completion, make a second review and will notify the General Contractor listing observed deficiencies.

E. When Architect finds Work is complete, he will consider close out submittals.

F. Final payment of up to 10 percent of Contract Value (in addition to any retainage being withheld) will be withheld until all punch list items, close out submittals, certifications, training performance bonds, and Acceptance Demonstrations are provided and accepted.

1.19 DEMOLITION

A. As per National Electric Code. NFPA 90A requires the removal of abandoned cable. Any cables that are not active or terminated at both ends are not permitted to remain in within the building infrastructure.

B. The Telecommunication Contractor for this project and under this division will be responsible for removing and disposal of all existing unused communication cabling and devices. Coordinate with the CM and owner for storage of some devices that will be reutilize in this project.

1.20 REMOVAL WORK

A. Particular care will be taken to avoid creating hazards on the site or causing disruption of service in the adjoining buildings.

B. All existing cabling will be removed and discarded as per the NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code® which requires the removal of abandoned cable.

C. All existing equipment and material indicated to be removed will be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. All existing equipment indicated to be turned over to the Owner will be presented to the Owner in good condition at a location designated by the Owner. All other existing equipment and material that is removed will be removed from the premises.

D. Remove all abandoned wiring, raceways and equipment not built into building construction. Where ceilings or walls are removed, all abandoned wiring, raceways, supports and equipment will be removed and the ends of live services capped. Abandoned elements built into walls or located above existing ceilings that are not being removed will remain. All raceway ends will be capped and be marked abandoned.

E. Equipment and materials that are removed from the premises will be legally disposed of. Particular attention will be taken regarding the disposal of any and all hazardous materials. Provide written manifests and certifications of legal disposal or recycling of all hazardous or regulated material to the Owner. Include copies with closeout submittals.

1.21 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment and work will meet the restraint requirements for a Seismic Zone - 2 location including installation and connections of material and equipment to the building structure.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 13 of 32

1.22 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROCEDURES

A. Should any suspected hazardous materials or hazardous related products or materials be encountered during the performance of the work, stop affected work immediately and so inform the Owner of the presence of hazardous materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The Electrical Code referred to in these specifications is the National Electrical Code as currently adopted by the State of Connecticut. All work will be provided in strict compliance with the Electrical Code and all regulations that may apply.

B. Where standards exist, for a particular category, products used on this project will be listed by an OSHA approved Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), and be approved or listed for the intended service and application.

C. These specifications do not undertake to repeat the requirements of codes, regulations or NRTL listing or labeling instructions. The Specifications or Drawings may require items or work beyond the requirements of applicable codes or regulations. The stricter, higher quality, greater quantity or higher cost will be provided. It is incumbent on the Installer, material and equipment suppliers to meet these specifications, applicable codes, regulations, and NRTL listing agency restrictions.

D. Manufacturers:

1. The word "Manufacturer" will include the Manufacturer, the Manufacturer's Representative, the Distributor, the Fabricator, and the Supplier of the particular classification of equipment, system, product, and material.

2. Each and every Manufacturer will refer to all Sections of the Specifications (Parts One - General, Two - Products and Three - Execution) and Drawings for requirements.

3. Each Manufacturer will be thoroughly familiar with all specified products relating to the Work and submit written objection prior to bid if he objects to the proposed use of any product.

4. During construction, each Manufacturer will visit the site periodically to observe the installation of supplied product. The Manufacturer will advise the Installer and the General Contractor immediately if supplied product is not being installed as recommended by the Manufacturer.

5. Upon completion of the Work, each Manufacturer will certify in writing that supplied product was installed according to the Manufacturer's recommendation and the installation is approved by the Manufacturer. Refer to Certifications.

6. Each Manufacturer, when accepting orders for material and equipment, agrees that submittal schedules and production schedules will be adjusted as required to accommodate material and equipment supplied for this project. Material and equipment will be manufactured and delivered to the site sufficiently ahead of schedule so as not to delay the completion of the Work.

7. The Contract Documents are based on the Manufacturer specified. If more than one Manufacturer is listed, the Contract Documents are based on the first Manufacturer named to establish functions, quality, space, and operating features, and all other Manufacturers are considered a substitution.

E. All work, equipment, and systems will be manufactured, provided, repaired, installed, and tested in accordance with the latest edition and all current amendments of the applicable


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 14 of 32

publications and standards of the organizations listed below as of the date of the Contract Documents. When the Specification requirements exceed the requirements of these publications and standards the Specifications will govern:

1. State Building Code (SBC) 2. Building Department Inspectional Services 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 4. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 5. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE) 8. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) 9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 10. Local Electric Code 11. Department of Public Safety (DPS) 12. Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA) 13. Department of Labor USA. Safety and Health Regulations for Construction (OSHA) 14. Energy Codes 15. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 16. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) 17. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) 18. Utilities Serving Project. 19. Fire Department. 20. Americans with Disabilities Act Applications Guidelines (ADAAG). 21. Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. 22. Any and all Federal, State and Local Standards, Codes and Authorities having

Jurisdiction. 23. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) 24. In addition, all phases of the Telecommunications System installation will adhere to

applicable Local Area Network (LAN) Specifications. The entire system and all components will be NRTL certified to appropriate ANSI/TIA/EIA performance rating category, and the following Industry standards:

a. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and addenda ”Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General Requirements”

b. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and addenda ”Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair”

c. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 and addenda ”Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling and Components Standard”

d. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B and addenda ”Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces”

e. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A and addenda ”Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings”

f. ANSI-J-STD-607-A and addenda ”Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications”

g. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 ”Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant”

h. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A ”Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant”

i. IEC/TR3 61000-5-2 - Ed. 1.0 and amendments “Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 5: Installation and mitigation guidelines - Section 2: Earthing and cabling”

j. ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Ed2.0 and amendments ”Information technology - Generic cabling for customer premises”


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 15 of 32

k. CENELEC EN 50173:2000 and amendments ”Information Technology - Generic cabling systems”

F. The Installer will have available at the job site at all times one copy of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code and ANSI/TIA/EIA Standards applicable to the work for use by the Installer and others.

G. The above requirements will not in any way limit responsibility or requirements to comply with all other codes, standards and laws.

H. Material, equipment, enclosures, and systems will be designed for use as required to suit the conditions, exterior or interior operation, dust tight, water tight, explosion-proof, or other special types.

I. Equipment will have as a minimum a factory coat of non-lead Manufacturer's standard finish paint unless otherwise indicated.

A. Refer to Section 2.1 - GENERAL for additional Manufacturer’s requirements.

B. Provide products meeting the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications from one of the following manufacturer's:

1. D-Rings: Hubbell 2. J-Hooks: Caddy, Minerallac, AT&T, Diamond, Chatsworth, Harrison/Dracon, B-Line,

Nelson, Mono-System. 3. Hook and Loop Fasteners: Hubbell, 4. Beam Clamps: Burndy, Minerallac, Kindorff, Steel City, OZ/Gedney 5. Split Mesh Strain 6. Reliefs (Kellums): Hubbell

C. D-Rings and J-Hooks will be sized to correctly support the number of cables which pass through them. Under no circumstances will cable quantity exceed 30 in any given support. Fill capacity will be as required by code for conduit. That is to say that every D-Ring or J-Hook will have a maximum of 40 percent fill capacity. Install additional supports as required.

D. Hook and loop fasteners will be designed for their specific application. For example, if a hook and loop fastener is used to support cables to a rack, it will have a grommeted opening for use with a 12-24 rack mounting screw.

E. Cable-ties are specifically prohibited.

F. Beam clamps will be steel with threaded bolt type closure. Spring steel or "quick-clip" type clamps are specifically prohibited.

G. Split mesh strain reliefs will be properly sized for each cable that they support. Only one cable will be installed in each split mesh strain relief.


2.2 CABLE SUPPORTS

2.3 BONDING AND GROUNDING JUMPER CABLE


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 16 of 32

B. Provide products meeting the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications from one of the following manufacturers:

1. Belden (No. 8669) or equivalent.

C. Jumper cable will be hollow braided, 60 amp capacity, copper.

D. Provide equal conductor as described in "B" above for aluminum equipment.

E. Jumpers will have compression or exothermic type terminals on both ends of cables. Terminals will be compatible with jumper cable material and equipment material in order to not have any degenerative reaction.


B. Provide products meeting or exceeding the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications from the following Manufacturer:

1. Hubbell NextSpeed Category 6 enhanced cable

C. Each work area outlet will consist of the following:

1. Single gang or double gang faceplate thermoplastic (nylon) with number of voice, data, video and sound jacks as indicated in the Specifications and Drawings.

2. The color of all faceplates will be "Hubbell White" unless otherwise indicated. Faceplates will have squared corners and will be same dimension as the electrical outlet plate being used on this project. Oversized face plates are specifically prohibited.

3. Furniture mounted work area outlet will be single gang with number of voice and data jacks indicated on Drawings or in Specifications, semi-flush mounted on furniture utilizing manufacturer provided box or opening in raceway. Adhesive mounting is not allowed. Furniture work area outlets will be coordinated with furniture manufacturer and will be specifically designed for powered furniture. Surface mounted outlets that are designed for general use applications are specifically prohibited.

4. Each faceplate will be able to support the jack modules, as required. All openings remaining after required numbers of jack modules have been installed in faceplates will be blanked off with manufacturer provided blank modules.

5. Manufacturer and Installer Company logo, signage or any advertisement will not be permitted on face of work area outlets.

6. Wall mounted telephone outlets will have modular jack integral to the faceplate and will have hardware to support the telephone device. Cover plate will be stainless steel. Provide wall mounted telephone outlets approved by the manufacturer of the work area outlets being provided on this project.

7. Work area outlets will have integral identification label holders with clear plastic cover panel. Adhesive label holders are specifically prohibited.

8. Work area outlets will have cable strain relief for each cable terminated. Cables will not rely on the conductor termination for support.

9. Work area outlets will have rear accessible modules and use Philips head cover plate screws.

10. Refer to Work Area Outlet Details for placement of jack 11. Provide products meeting the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications from one

of the following manufacturers.

2.4 UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR (UTP) STATION CABLING SYSTEMS


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 17 of 32

a. Wire and Cable: HUBBELL CABLE, OR HUBBELL CABLE PARTNERS b. Modular Jacks: HUBBELL c. Patch Panels: HUBBELL d. Cable Management: HUBBELL e. Cross Connect Blocks: HUBBELL f. Cross Connect Block Panels: HUBBELL g. Patch Cables: HUBBELL

12. Cross Connect Cabling: Of same Wire and Cable Manufacturer. 13. NOTE: Each of the products listed herein will be provided to ensure manufactures

warranty.

D. UTP Cabling system Pin/Pair Termination Assignment

1. The UTP cabling systems will have TIA/EIA T568B pin/pair termination assignment. All eight conductors provided will be properly and consistently terminated at both ends throughout the entire systems. Splitting pairs of conductors between multiple jacks or other devices is specifically prohibited.

E. Horizontal Cable

1. Twisted-Pair Cabling: All qualified cables will exceed the most severe requirements provided in the Industry Requirements by the worst case margins listed by the manufacturer:

a. Hubbell NextSpeed® category 6 enhanced cable. b. Cable sheath will be the following colors:

1) Data – 1 Blue 2) Data – 2 Green 3) Data – 3 Purple 4) Voice – 1 Gray

2. Modular Jacks (Work Area Outlets)

a. All category 6 modular outlets will: b. Be independently verified for category 6 compliance c. Be available in black, white, red, gray, yellow, blue, orange, ivory, bright white, light

ivory and alpine white d. Have available a gravity feed (45 degree angled) design to help control patch cord

bend radius as well as flush mount design e. Utilizes TRI-BALANCE technology with optimized pair balance design and linear

crosstalk response to address applications up to 250 MHz f. Have 310 style insulation displacement connectors with quadrant pair isolation and

a Pyramid wire entry system g. Allow termination with a single conductor impact tool h. Have available termination aid (included with each box of 20) for stabilization of

module to facilitate lacing and impact during termination i. Modules should feature category markings on front and rear of outlet j. Be backwards compatible to allow lower performing categories of cables or

connecting hardware to operate to their full capacity k. Have rear protective strain relief caps with side or rear entry, which can be

installed onto cable before or after termination


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 18 of 32

l. Support industry standards for T568B wiring options on each individual outlet m. Allow installation from the front or rear of the faceplate, and allow for the jack to

pass through the faceplate without re-termination n. Be side-stackable for high-density solutions o. Have a color matching protective, hinged or flexible door to protect the outlet from

dust and other airborne contaminants p. Provide color-coded, slide-in icons available for circuit identification q. Allow for a minimum of 200 terminations without signal degradation below

standards compliance limits r. Be constructed of high impact, flame-retardant thermoplastic s. Must be certified by Underwriters Laboratories to United States Standards and

C22.2 Canadian Telecommunications Standards

3. Modular jacks color will be:

a. Voice – 1 Gray (Category 6) b. Data – 1 Blue (Category 6) c. Data – 2 Green (Category 6) d. Data – 3 Purple (Category 6)

4. Each work area outlet and modular jack will have jack opening dust cover. Modular jacks that do not have integral dust covers will have dust covers installed on each modular jack.

5. Each 8-position modular jack will be color coded and have color-coded icons. 6. Horizontal cables will have single point IDC Type connection integral to the jacks only. 7. Jack modules will be flame retardant thermoplastic with integral cable strain relief. 8. .

F. Cable Management

1. Each equipment rack and equipment cabinet will have cable management panels with horizontal and vertical brackets.

a. Cable management will be EIA nineteen-inch (518mm) rack mounted 1.75-inch (44mm) high panel with horizontal and vertical patch cable distribution rings, or approved equivalent and will be provided above and below each patch panel in the equipment rack.

b. Patch panel manufacturer will furnish equipment rack cable management. c. Cable management for high density, IDC Type cross-connect block panels will be

distribution rings integral to the panel or approved equivalent. Cable management will be provided above and below each cross connect block in the equipment rack.

G. Patch Cables and Line Cords

1. All category 6 compliant, modular equipment cords will: 2. Be factory assembled and 100% transmission tested with laboratory grade network

analyzers for proper performance up to 250 MHz 3. Be backwards compatible with lower performing categories 4. Be equipped with identical modular 8-position plugs on both ends, wired straight through

with standards compliant wiring 5. Utilize patented metallic isolator shields pairs inside plug for optimum NEXT performance

and a 360 degree crimp for providing excellent plug-to-cable strain relief without causing pair deformation


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 19 of 32

6. Obtain the required performance without use of printed circuit board components 7. Incorporate internal stranded cordage isolator within a round, flame-retardant jacket to

provide extended flex life and maintain ideal pair geometry 8. Use bend relief compliant boots (with optional color-coded icons) to ensure proper

category 6 performance and feature a latch guard to protect against snagging 9. Use modular plugs which exceed FCC CFR 47 part 68 subpart F and IEC 60603-7

specifications, have 50 micro-inches minimum of gold plating over nickel contacts and are resistant to corrosion from humidity, extreme temperatures, and airborne contaminants

10. Be available in standard lengths of 3, 5, 7, 10, 15 and 20 ft. with custom lengths available upon request

11. Offer multiple cable colors (with color matching boots) in standard colors of black, white, red, gray, yellow, blue and green for proper circuit identification

12. Be certified by Underwriters Laboratories to United States Standards and C22.2 Canadian Telecommunications Standards

13. Meet the Hubbell NextSpeed category 6 enhanced performance specifications.

H. Cross Connect Blocks – Voice Cabling Systems

1. Category 6:

a. Cross-connect blocks will be ANSI/TIA/EIA Category 6 (UL Category 6) color-coded, high density, IDC type terminations, 100, 200, or 300 pair, cross connect blocks. Type 66 IDC cross connect blocks or similar are not allowed. Cross-connect blocks will have integral standoff support.

b. Modular connectors that allow pre-connectorized cables to be connected to the cross connect blocks are specifically prohibited. Cables will have single point IDC type connection to the cross-connect blocks only.

c. Each (4 pair) connection will have color-coded identification label. Continuous label strips for multiple in-line terminations are acceptable.

d. Provide with horizontal and vertical cable management. e. Provide separate, dedicated cross-connect blocks for voice cabling systems.

2. Cross-connect cabling will be NRTL certified that it meets or exceeds the TIA/EIA UL category rating of the system installed.

I. Cross Connect Blocks – Facilities Systems Cabling

1. Category 6:

a. Cross-connect blocks will be ANSI/TIA/EIA Category 6 (UL Category 6) color-coded, high density, IDC type terminations, 100 pair, cross connect blocks. Type 66 IDC cross connect blocks or similar are not allowed. Cross-connect blocks will have integral standoff support.

b. Modular connectors that allow preconnectorized cables to be connected to the cross connect blocks are specifically prohibited. Cables will have single point IDC type connection to the cross-connect blocks only.

c. Each (4 pair) connection will have color-coded identification label. Continuous label strips for multiple in-line terminations are acceptable.

d. Provide with horizontal and vertical cable management. e. Provide separate, dedicated cross-connect blocks for facilities cabling systems.

2. Cross-connect cabling will be NRTL certified that it meets or exceeds the TIA/EIA UL category rating of the system installed.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 20 of 32

3. The frequency response will be from 12 MHZ to 890 MHZ and the return loss at any port will be no less than 14 dB. Isolation between any two tap outlets will be no less than 30 dB from 5 MHZ to 400 MHZ and no less than 15 dB from 470 MHZ to 806 MHZ.

4. The tap will be housed in a rugged cast aluminum housing provided with flanges to permit mounting on any flat surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Loose materials will not be stored on-site. A "gang box" is acceptable to be placed in a location agreeable to the Owner and the General Contractor. The Installer is responsible for all equipment and materials and for their delivery until the system is deemed complete and accepted by the Owner.

B. A trailer may be used for the storage of materials to be located on the Owner's property at a location designated by the Owner and the General Contractor. Such on-site storage will be kept locked by the Installer. Security for the trailer and its contents will be strictly the responsibility of the Installer.

C. Protect existing in spaces where work is being performed to protect it from damage and from the accumulation of dirt.

D. Any ceilings, walls, floors, furniture, equipment, furnishings, etc., damaged by the work of this Section will be replaced, or at the Owner's option, repaired with similar materials, workmanship and quality.

E. Work includes field survey of existing conditions, systems, equipment and tracing of existing circuits in order to determine scope of work.

F. Maintain the existing building in operation at all times during the entire construction period. If it is necessary to have a system shutdown, a written request for approval will be submitted in advance stating the estimated shutdown time. Work will be planned to minimize shutdown. Shutdowns will be at the convenience of the Owner and, if necessary, on premium time.

G. Clean and touch up all equipment, materials and work sites at the completion of work in each area.

H. Certain portions of the work area may be occupied during construction. Determine which areas and schedule work accordingly and include necessary premium time.

I. Make sure necessary provisions to provide continuous service of all existing systems throughout all occupied areas.

J. Existing System Operation:

1. It is imperative that completely operable and operating computer systems be maintained in all areas of the building where such operation is provided.

2. Temporary and short interval interruptions of the ability of a single existing system zone in any area of the building to operate to complete installation of the building network according to the building construction phases may be tolerated with the express written permission of the Owner. This permission will only be considered if a written request for such an interruption is made before the actual need therefore.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 21 of 32

3.2 WORK AREA OUTLETS

A. All work area outlet locations will be as indicated on the Drawings. Uniquely label each work area outlet and jack within the outlet according to the numbering convention outlined in the section on labeling.

B. Work area outlets installed in casework will have their cables installed within the conduit provided or raceway provided.

C. Install jack and connector modules as indicated in the details on the Drawings.

D. Work area outlets will be seated properly and will be installed level on walls and parallel to building elements as required.

3.3 TERMINATIONS

A. All copper and fiber conductors (every cable) will be completely terminated at both ends.

3.4 SEALING OF PENETRATIONS AND OPENINGS

A. Smoke and Fire Stopping Seals:

1. All firestop systems will be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations and will be completely installed and available for inspection by the local inspection authorities prior to cable system acceptance.

2. Provide a seal around raceways or cables penetrating full height walls (slab to slab), floors or ventilation or air handling ducts so that the spread of fire or products of combustion will not be substantially increased.

3. Penetrations through fire-resistant-rated walls, partitions, floors or ceilings will be fire stopped using approved methods and NRTL listed products to maintain the fire resistance rating.

4. Installation restrictions of the listing agencies will be strictly adhered to {e.g. 24 inch (610 mm) minimum horizontal separation between boxes on opposite sides of the wall, maximum square inch opening in wall}.

5. Fire stopping in sleeves or in areas having small openings that may require the addition or modification of installed cables or raceways will be soft, pliable, non-hardening fire stop putty. Putty will be water resistant and intumescent.

6. Fire stopping in locations not likely to require frequent modification will be NRTL listed putty or caulk to meet the required fire resistance rating.

7. Box penetrations into a fire rated wall or shaft will have a fire-stopping pad installed on the back of the box.

8. Fire stopping of cable trays through walls will be with NRTL listed bags to meet the required fire resistive rating and that will not allow products of combustion to pass through the protected opening. The NRTL listed bags will be installed inside and on both sides of the opening as required to meet the required resistive fire rating of the wall.

9. Fire stopping materials will be NRTL listed to UL 1479 (ASTM E814). Installation methods will conform to a UL fire stopping system. Submit specifications and installation drawings for the type of material to be used. Fire stopping materials will be as manufactured by 3M, International Protective Coatings Corp., Specified Technologies, Inc., Carborundum Company, RayChem, Nelson Fire Stop or approved equal.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 22 of 32

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. All cabling will be installed in conduit where indicated on plans, or will be installed open using other methods, approved by Engineer, such as J-Hooks.

1. Install wiring, per Manufacturers recommendations.

B. All conduits and raceways will have plenum rated pull strings remaining after cable is pulled.

C. Impedance and Level Matching:

1. Carefully match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.

D. Layout of structured cabling systems equipment cabinet and racks

1. The equipment cabinet and racks will contain the following equipment:

a. Fiber optic patch panel b. Fiber optic cable management c. Surge protected power strip d. Patch panels -Horizontal distribution e. Horizontal distribution cable management f. Patch cords

2. The fiber patch panel will be placed at the top of the active rack and cabinet. 3. Provide 1 RU wire management above and below the fiber patch panel. 4. The remaining space within the cabinet is for the installation of network electronics -

provided by the Owner. 5. Grounding bars will be installed as per Division 26 specifications at location shown on

drawings.

3.6 LABELING

A. Labeling procedure will meet EIA/TIA 568A, 606-A (Class 2 Administration) and BICSI Standards.

B. The labeling scheme will be provided as follows at all locations within the cable infrastructure:

1. Labeling will follow the following standard:

a. Location identification will start from the left, as you walk in the doorway, and continue around the room in a clockwise direction.

b. Data drops will be labeled with the room number and sequential letters, starting with 'A' (e.g. the first three data drops in Room 201 would be labeled 201A, 201B and 201C). Skip the letter 'V'.

c. Voice drops will be labeled with the room number and the letter 'V' (e.g. the telephone drop in Room 128 would be 128V).

C. Hand-written and embossed type labels are specifically prohibited. In addition, provide the following:


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 23 of 32

1. Label each outlet with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum 3/16 in. high characters.

2. Label each cable with permanent self-adhesive label with minimum, 1/8 in. high characters, in the following locations:

a. Inside receptacle box at the work area. b. Behind the communication room patch panel or punch block.

3. Use labels on face of data patch panels. Provide facility assignment records in a protective cover at each telecommunications room location that is specific to the facilities terminated therein.

4. Use color-coded labels for each termination field that conforms to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606(A) standard color codes for termination blocks.

5. Mount termination blocks on color-coded backboards. 6. Labels will be machine-printed. Hand-lettered labels will not be acceptable.

D. Use industry standard EIA/TIA and BICSI color codes as specified herein and maintain consistent color-coding throughout the building.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Work, in general, includes furnishing and installing fire and smoke barrier penetration seals for openings in floor, walls, and other elements of construction.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 26 - Conduit. 2. Underwriter Laboratories, Inc., "Fire Resistance Directory" Volume II.

C. Applicator Qualifications: Two years experience installing UL classified firestopping.

D. Performance of materials will have been tested to provide fire rating equal to that of the construction.

E. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings showing each condition requiring penetration seals indicating proposed UL systems materials, anchorage, methods of installation, and actual adjacent construction.

2. Submit a copy of UL illustration of each proposed system indicating Manufacturer approved modifications.

F. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit copies of Manufacturer’s specifications, recommendations, installation instructions, and maintenance data for each type of material required. Include letter indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is recommended for the applications shown.

G. Applicator's Qualification Statement: List past projects indicating required experience.

H. Existing Project Conditions:

1. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 24 of 32

2. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and supporting brackets have been installed.

I. Environmental Requirements:

1. Furnish adequate ventilation if using solvent. 2. Furnish forced air ventilation during installation if required by Manufacturer. 3. Keep flammable materials away from sparks or flame. 4. Provide masking and drop cloths to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces by

firestopping materials.

J. Warranties: Submit copies of written warranty, minimum of one year, agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion residence, weather resistance, extrusion residence, migration residence, stain resistance, or general durability or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted Manufacturer’s data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. The guarantee period will be one year from date of substantial completion.

K. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of Nelson Fire Protection Products or Engineers approved equal as further defined in the. Systems and Applications Schedule in Part 3 of this section.

L. Materials:

1. Provide materials classified by UL to provide Fire Barrier equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.

2. Provide asbestos free materials that comply with applicable codes and have been tested in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E-814.

M. Preparation: Clean surfaces to be in contact with penetration seal materials of dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting, adhesion, or the required fire resistance.

N. Installation:

1. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL Building Materials Directory and in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Seal holes or voids made by penetration to ensure an effective smoke barrier. 3. Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than four inches in width and

subject to traffic or loading, install firestopping materials capable of supporting same loading as floor.

4. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic.

O. Field Quality Control:

1. Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas.

2. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. 3. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or

penetration by other trades.

P. Adjusting and Cleaning:

1. Clean up spills of liquid components.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 25 of 32

2. Neatly cut and trim materials as required. 3. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged clean condition.

Q. Systems and Application Schedule:

CONSTRUCTION CONDITION UL DESIGNATION

1 Metal Pipe or Conduit Through Round Opening in brick, CMUs, and Concrete

49, 95, 138, 202

2 Non-metallic (Plastic) Pipe or Conduit Through Opening in Brick, CMUs, and Concrete

64

3 Metal Pipe or Conduit Through Gypsum Board Wall 1374 Non-metallic (Plastic) Pipe or Conduit Through Gypsum

Board Wall 148

5 Metal Pipe or Conduit Through Wood Construction 59,1696 Non-Metallic (Plastic) Pipe or Conduit Through Wood Con-

struction 160, 167

3.8 CABLING SYSTEM TESTING

A. General:

1. Cabling systems will meet or exceed the electrical and transmission characteristics of the systems specified.

2. Cable segments and links will be tested and certified from both ends of the cable for each of the construction phases. (Verify that cable labeling matches at both ends).

3. The Installer will test all cables installed under this Section. 4. The systems will not be considered certified until the tester has acknowledged that the

performance of the physical layer of each system has been fully tested and is operational at the completion of the installation phase.

5. After the installation is complete, in addition to any other required testing as described herein, and at such times as the Owner/Engineer directs, the Contractor will be present while the Owner conducts an operating test for approval. The installation will be demonstrated to be in accordance with the requirements of this specification. Any defects revealed will be corrected promptly at the Contractor's expense and the tests performed again.

6. After review of the completed test results, the Owner/Engineer reserves the right to retest up to 100 of the installed cables, utilizing the Contractor's tester and the Contractor's labor.

B. Equipment Manufacturer’s Factory Test:

1. Each cable and equipment Manufacturer will factory test their respective products being installed on this project and provide test reports at time of delivery. Provide separate respective test reports indicating that they meet or exceed the latest applicable TIA/EIA Standards and technical bulletins.

2. All other products relative to this specification will be tested to its respective industry strictest standards.

3. Each Manufacturer will factory test their respective cable or equipment provided to this project at several lower frequency levels, including the minimum and maximum frequency level indicated herein. The test reports will indicate test results for at least five equal incremental frequency levels including the maximum required.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 26 of 32

C. Field Testing Equipment: Submit during shop drawing review on the testing equipment to be utilized on this project. Provide a hard copy of all field testing.

1. Unshielded Twisted Pair Testing Equipment:

a. Cable tester will be NRTL certified for EIA/TIA TSB95. b. The cable tester will have a wide variety of preprogrammed cable types as an

integral part of its testing system and have the ability to test cables less than 6 feet (6ft.) from the test point.

c. All balanced twisted-pair field testers will be factory calibrated each calendar year by the field test equipment manufacturer as stipulated by the manuals provided with the field test unit. The calibration certificate will be provided for review prior to the start of testing.

d. Testing will be accomplished using level III or higher field tester that is loaded with the most current version of test software by the manufacturer of the test equipment.

e. Provide factory calibration report of field test equipment.

3.9 CATEGORY 6 CABLE TESTING

A. Cabling systems will meet or exceed the electrical and transmission characteristics of the systems specified.

B. Cable segments and links will be tested from both ends of the cable for each of the construction phases. (Verify that cable labeling matches at both ends).

C. The system will not be considered certified until the tester has acknowledged that the performance of the physical layer of the system has been fully tested and is operational at the completion of the installation phase.

D. Provide test reports upon completion of each phase of the project.

E. After the installation is complete, in addition to any other required testing as described herein, and at such times as the Owner/Engineer directs, the Contractor will be present while the Owner conducts an operating test for approval. The installation will be demonstrated to be in accordance with the requirements of this specification. Any defects revealed will be corrected promptly at the Contractor's expense and the tests performed again.

F. After review of the completed test results, the Owner/Engineer reserves the right to retest up to 100 of the installed cables, utilizing the Contractor's tester and the Contractor's labor.

G. Equipment Manufacturer’s Factory Test

1. Each cable and equipment Manufacturer will factory test their respective products being installed on this project and provide test reports at time of delivery. Provide separate respective test reports indicating that they meet or exceed the latest applicable TIA/EIA Standards and technical bulletins.

2. All other products relative to this specification will be tested to its respective industry strictest standards.

3. Each Manufacturer will factory test their respective cable or equipment provided to this project at several lower frequency levels, including the minimum and maximum frequency level indicated herein. The test reports will indicate test results for at least five equal incremental frequency levels including the maximum required.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 27 of 32

H. Field Testing Equipment: Submit during shop drawing review on the testing equipment to be utilized on this project. The installer will test all cables installed under this Section.

1. Unshielded Twisted Pair Testing Equipment:

a. The cable tester will have a wide variety of preprogrammed cable types as an integral part of its testing system and have the ability to test cables less than 6 feet (6ft.) from the test point.

b. Testing will be accomplished using level III or higher field tester that is loaded with the most current version of test software by the manufacturer of the test equipment.

c. Provide factory calibration report of field test equipment.

I. Testing Procedures:

1. Testing will conform to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 standard or current version of the Category 6 standard.

2. Testing will be to the Permanent Link Test Parameters. 3. Test each pair and shield of each cable for opens, shorts, grounds, and pair reversal.

Correct grounded and reversed pairs. Examine open and shorted pairs to determine if problem is caused by improper termination. If termination is proper, tag bad pairs at both ends and note on termination sheets.

a. If copper cables contain more than the following quantity of bad pairs, or if outer sheath damage is cause of bad pairs, remove and replace the entire cable at no cost to the Owner:

CABLE SIZE MAXIMUM BAD PAIRS

<100 1 101 to 300 1 – 3 301 to 600 3 – 6 >601 6

b. If horizontal cable contains bad conductors or shield, remove and replace cable.

4. Test each UTP cable and passive components. Provide certification that entire installation of UTP cabling, equipment and jacks are NRTL certified meeting or exceeding a minimum of category performance specified on all four pairs of conductors.

5. Tests will be based on each pair of conductors and not the aggregate multiple pair results.

6. Test all installed cable segments end-to-end, from the telecommunications room horizontal patch panel/cross connect block panel to each work area outlet and from each telecommunications room backbone patch panel/cross-connect block panel to respective main cross connect, and from the work area outlet to the main cross-connect (through patch cables or cross- connect wiring) with a Signal Injector, Graphical Link Testing Meter and Time Domain Reflectometer (TDR) for compliance to latest TIA/EIA performance requirements, as well as NEXT, ELFEXT, structural return loss, alternating power sum, opens, shorts, continuity, cable length, and characteristic impedance.

7. Provide report indicating failures and what actions were taken to ensure a passing horizontal cable and its terminations. Any cable failing the certification test (Fail, Fail* or, Pass*) must have remedial work done to provide a full pass test result; Remediation may include re-termination or replacement of the cable, which fails. No cables passing within tolerance only (Conditional Pass*) will be accepted.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 28 of 32

J. Test results:

1. The test results information for each link will be recorded in the memory of the field tester upon completion of the test. The tester will be capable of storing test data in either internal or external memory. The external media used will be left to the discretion of the user.

2. Test results saved by the tester will be transferred into a Windows based database utility that allows for maintenance, inspection and archiving of these test records. A guarantee must be made that the measurement results are transferred to the PC unaltered as well as any printed reports generated from the software application.

3. Optional formats of data reporting are: comma separated variable (.csv), Portable Document File (.pdf) or compatible, plain text (.txt), or hypertext markup language (.html/.htm).

4. Test Results will include the following:

a. Applicable room number of jack location (room number per Contract Documents) b. Applicable Telecommunications Room number c. Circuit I.D. number with corresponding jack identifier d. Wire Map – will include the following:

1) Continuity to the remote end 2) Shorts between any two or more conductors 3) Crossed pairs 4) Reversed pairs 5) Split pairs 6) Any other mis-wiring

e. Length f. Insertion Loss g. Near-end Crosstalk (NEXT) Loss h. PS-NEXT (Power Sum Near End Cross Talk) i. ELFEXT (Equal Level Far End Cross Talk) j. PS-ELFEXT (Power Sum Equal Level Far End Cross Talk) k. Propagation Delay l. Delay Skew m. Return loss

5. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to observe testing and/or randomly sample completed links for conformance to project specifications.

6. .

3.10 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEMS DOCUMENTATION

A. Label all equipment as herein specified.

B. Provide:

1. Provide Building Structured Cabling Systems Administration Report indicating TIA/EIA-606 required information.

2. Hard copy documentation of test results for every cable segment and link in 3- ring binder. Documents will include measured values as well as whether or not the test passed.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 29 of 32

3. "Record" drawings indicating location of all equipment including but not limited to work area outlets, patch panels, cross connect blocks, on each segment and cable routing. Indicate labeling for each piece of equipment.

4. Record drawings indicating actual cable routes and outlet identifiers. Provide respective copies mounted in each telecommunications room, and the main cross connect.

C. Provide ''as-built'' Drawings on AutoCAD Version 2004 or higher to the Owner. Obtain copy of original Drawings from the Architect.

D. Submit NRTL certification that the voice, data and video cabling systems meets the transmission requirements of TIA/EIA 568A and TSB72.

E. Submit NRTL certification that the fiber optic cabling system meets the transmission requirements of TIA/EIA 455, 492AAAA, 568A and TSB72.

F. Provide installer/tester certificate indicating compliance with transmission and reliability requirements for all components of the systems installed.

3.11 TRAINING

A. As a minimum training sessions will consist of the following:

1. General project information and review will be by the General Foreman or Superintendent of the Trade.

2. Specific system training will be by a Factory Trained Representative. 3. Provide a complete review of the project and systems including, but not limited to, the

following:

a. Review each Record Drawing (use of typicals is acceptable). b. Note equipment layouts, locations and control points. c. Review each system. d. Review system design operation and philosophy. e. Review alarms and necessary responses. f. Review standard troubleshooting techniques for each system. g. Review areas served by equipment. h. Identify color codes used. i. Review features and special functions. j. Review maintenance requirements. k. Review operation and maintenance manuals. l. Respond to questions (record questions and answers).

4. After training, walk the entire project, review each equipment room and typical locations. Explain equipment and proper operation.

B. During the instruction period the Owner and Maintenance Manual will be used and explained.

C. The Owner and Maintenance Manual material will be bound in 3-ring binders and indexed. On the edge of the binder provide a clear see-through plastic holder with a typed card indicating the Project name, the Architect's name, the installer's name and the Volume number (e.g., Vol. No.1 of 2).


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 30 of 32

D. Provide name, address and telephone number of the Manufacturer’s representative and Service Company for all items supplied so that the source of replacement parts and service can be readily obtained.

1. Include copies of Manufacturer’s and installer's warranties and maintenance contracts and performance bonds properly executed and signed by an authorized representative.

2. Include copies of all test reports and certifications.

3.12 ACCEPTANCE DEMONSTRATIONS

A. Systems installed under this Section will be demonstrated to the Owner and Architect. Demonstrations are in addition to necessary testing and training sessions. Notify all parties at least 7 days prior to the scheduled demonstration. Schedule demonstrations in cooperation with and at times convenient to all parties and so as to not disturb ongoing activities.

B. Systems will be tested prior to the demonstrations and each system will be fully operational and tested prior to arranging the Acceptance Demonstration. Final payments will be withheld until a satisfactory demonstration is provided for all systems indicated or requested.

C. If the demonstration is not totally complete, performing all functions, features and connections or interfaces with other systems, or if there is a failure during the demonstration, additional demonstrations will be arranged. Provide and pay for all costs, labor and expenses incurred for all attendees for each additional demonstration required for acceptance and demonstration of complete system operation.

D. Demonstrations will be scheduled in ample time to complete all activities prior to final acceptance and Owner occupancy. Demonstrations will take place at least 30 days prior to the scheduled project completion date and 30 days prior to owner's use and occupancy.

E. As a minimum, provide demonstrations for systems indicated under "Work Included" under Part One of the Specifications. Provide demonstrations of additional systems as requested by the Owner, or Architect.

3.13 PROJECT OWNER COORDINATION

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of the project and in ample time to address and resolve any coordination issues, request and arrange meetings between the Owner, Owner's Vendors and Consultants, Architect and General Contractor to discuss the Scope of Work for each system being provided and the interface required for a fully functional and operational system upon project completion. Initial meetings will be scheduled three months prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion date or as soon as Submittals are submitted and reviewed for projects with shorter schedules.

B. At these meetings the required interface with the Owner will be reviewed, requests for information required to complete programming or for coordination will be presented and system operation and philosophy will be discussed.

C. Additional meetings will be held as requested by any party so that all issues are resolved and with the goal and intent being that all systems are fully operational and functional upon project Substantial Completion and that the responsibility for all components required is clearly established.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 31 of 32

3.14 CLEANING UP

A. Upon completion of all work, and testing, thoroughly inspect all exposed portions of the installation and completely remove all exposed labels, markings, and foreign material.

B. The interior of all boxes and cabinets will be left clean; exposed surfaces will be cleaned and plated surfaces polished.

C. Repair damage to finish surfaces resulting from work under this Section.

D. Remove material and equipment from areas of work and storage areas.

E. All equipment will be clean from dirt, dust, and fingerprints prior to final acceptance.

F. Touch up all damaged pre-finished equipment using materials and methods recommended by the Manufacturer.

3.15 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Provide close out submittals as required herein and in SECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT including the following close out submittals.

1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 2. Record Drawings 3. Test Reports 4. Warranty certification form Manufacturer’s 5. Extra Materials 6. Provide factory calibration report of field test equipment

B. Obtain written receipts of acceptance close out submittals submitted. Receipts will specifically detail what is being delivered (description, quantity and specification section) and will be dated and signed by firm delivering materials and by the Owner's Representative.

C. Provide patch cables as follows:

1. Provide one UTP patch cable for each horizontal cable terminated within the patch panel. 2. Coordinate patch cable lengths with the Owner prior to ordering. 3. Provide fifteen percent (15%) spare patch cables and line cords for each cable type and

length of each type provided. 4. Provide ten percent (10%) spare dust covers provided to the Owner at the completion of

the project.

D. Provide equipment cords as follows:

1. Provide one 10-foot (3 m) Category 6 equipment cord for each data connector installed in data Work Area Outlets.

2. Coordinate equipment cord lengths with the Owner prior to ordering. 3. Provide fifteen (15%) spare equipment cords.

E. Provide record drawings indicating actual cable routing and cable terminations including all required identifiers. Provide a half size laminated set of drawings mounted in the Main Communications Equipment Room.


TELECOM


APRIL 18, 2016; PAGE 32 of 32

F. All sketches, drawings, and charts herein are for the purpose of providing for specifications in a simplified format. Errors and omissions in such do not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing a fully complete, secure and properly operating integrated instructional technology network system suitable for the intended use. Bidders must obtain a complete set of Project Drawings and Specifications to determine the full scope of work. In case of conflict, the Project Drawings and Specifications will prevail.


Date post:	19-Oct-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	5 times
Download:	0 times